[go: up one dir, main page]

TWI627510B - Substrate processing device - Google Patents

Substrate processing device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI627510B
TWI627510B TW103123245A TW103123245A TWI627510B TW I627510 B TWI627510 B TW I627510B TW 103123245 A TW103123245 A TW 103123245A TW 103123245 A TW103123245 A TW 103123245A TW I627510 B TWI627510 B TW I627510B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
substrate
unit
mask
exposure
roller
Prior art date
Application number
TW103123245A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201514631A (en
Inventor
Tomonari Suzuki
Hiroki Komiyama
Masaki Kato
Tomoyuki Watanabe
Yoshiaki Kito
Masakazu Hori
Yosuke Hayashida
Tohru Kiuchi
Original Assignee
Nikon Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2013142922A external-priority patent/JP2015018006A/en
Priority claimed from JP2014123088A external-priority patent/JP6459234B2/en
Application filed by Nikon Corp filed Critical Nikon Corp
Publication of TW201514631A publication Critical patent/TW201514631A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI627510B publication Critical patent/TWI627510B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/708Construction of apparatus, e.g. environment aspects, hygiene aspects or materials
    • G03F7/70858Environment aspects, e.g. pressure of beam-path gas, temperature
    • G03F7/709Vibration, e.g. vibration detection, compensation, suppression or isolation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/24Curved surfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70058Mask illumination systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70758Drive means, e.g. actuators, motors for long- or short-stroke modules or fine or coarse driving
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70775Position control, e.g. interferometers or encoders for determining the stage position
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50Photovoltaic [PV] energy
    • Y02E10/549Organic PV cells
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P70/00Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
    • Y02P70/50Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product

Landscapes

  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Atmospheric Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
  • Investigating Materials By The Use Of Optical Means Adapted For Particular Applications (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)

Abstract

本發明之目的在降低對曝光單元之振動,更合適的進行使用曝光單元之曝光。基板處理裝置(U3),具備設在設置面(E)上之除振台(131)、設在除振台(131)上對被供應之基板(P)進行曝光處理之曝光單元(121)以及設在設置面(E)上並與曝光單元(121)成非接觸之獨立狀態設置、作為進行對曝光單元(121)之處理之處理單元的位置調整單元(120)及驅動單元(122)。 The object of the present invention is to reduce the vibration to the exposure unit, and to perform the exposure using the exposure unit more appropriately. Substrate processing device (U3), which includes a vibration isolator (131) provided on the installation surface (E), and an exposure unit (121) disposed on the vibration isolator (131) to perform exposure processing on the supplied substrate (P) And a position adjustment unit (120) and a driving unit (122) provided on the setting surface (E) and in a non-contact independent state setting with the exposure unit (121) as a processing unit for processing the exposure unit (121) .

Description

基板處理裝置 Substrate processing device

本發明係關於用以在基板上形成電子元件用圖案之基板處理裝置、元件製造系統、元件製造方法及圖案形成裝置。 The present invention relates to a substrate processing apparatus, a component manufacturing system, a component manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern for an electronic component on a substrate.

一直以來,如特開平9-219353號公報所示,作為基板處理裝置,一種對設在於平台上移動之移動載台上之基板進行元件圖案之曝光的曝光裝置廣為人知。此曝光裝置之平台係透過具有除振機構之機架構件被支承於基台。移動載台在設於平台上之可動導件上移動於X方向。可動導件,藉由設在基台上之2支線性馬達於平台上移動於Y方向。2支線性馬達設在基台之X方向兩側、以非接觸方式使可動導件往Y方向移動。也就是說,各線性馬達具有可動子與固定子,固定子被固定在基台上,而可動子則分別固定在可動導件之X方向兩側,可動子與固定子為非接觸狀態。前述特開平9-219353號公報之曝光裝置,由於線性馬達之可動子及固定子為非接觸狀態,因此抑制了因干擾造成之振動透過可動導件及移動載台傳遞至平台上。 Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, as a substrate processing apparatus, an exposure apparatus that exposes a component pattern on a substrate provided on a mobile stage that moves on a platform is widely known. The platform of this exposure device is supported on a base by a frame member having a vibration isolation mechanism. The moving carrier moves in the X direction on a movable guide provided on the platform. The movable guide moves in the Y direction on the platform by two linear motors provided on the base. Two linear motors are set on both sides in the X direction of the base and move the movable guide in the Y direction in a non-contact manner. That is to say, each linear motor has a mover and a fixer. The fixer is fixed on the abutment, and the mover is fixed on both sides of the movable guide in the X direction. The mover and the fixer are in a non-contact state. In the exposure device of the aforementioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, since the movable element and the fixed element of the linear motor are in a non-contact state, the vibration caused by interference is suppressed from being transmitted to the platform through the movable guide and the moving stage.

前述特開平9-219353號公報之曝光裝置,係以2條線性馬達使可動導件於平台上往Y方向移動,同樣的,移動載台相對可動導件之移動亦使用線性馬達進行。此場合,線性馬達亦係以非接觸使移動載台往X方向 移動。然而,由於係在平台上相對可動導件使移動載台移動,故因移動載台之移動產生之振動有可能會傳至平台。 The exposure device of the aforementioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353 uses two linear motors to move the movable guide on the platform in the Y direction. Similarly, the movement of the movable stage relative to the movable guide is also performed using a linear motor. In this case, the linear motor also moves the moving stage to the X direction without contact. mobile. However, since the mobile carrier is moved by relatively movable guides on the platform, vibrations caused by the movement of the mobile carrier may be transmitted to the platform.

又,前述特開平9-219353號公報之曝光裝置,雖係於移動載台上保持基板進行曝光,但不限於此構成,亦有以連續狀態供應薄膜狀基板,對所供應之基板進行元件圖案之掃描曝光的情形。此場合,於基板之供應時,即有基板振動之可能性。 In addition, the exposure device of the aforementioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353 is not limited to this structure, although the exposure is performed by holding the substrate on a moving stage, and there is also a case where a thin film substrate is supplied in a continuous state, and an element pattern is provided on the supplied substrate. Scanning exposure. In this case, there is a possibility that the substrate vibrates when the substrate is supplied.

本發明之各態樣,乃鑑於上述課題而為,其目的在提供一種能更為降低對曝光單元之振動,而能非常適合地進行使用曝光單元之曝光的基板處理裝置、元件製造系統、元件製造方法及圖案形成裝置。 The various aspects of the present invention have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a substrate processing apparatus, a component manufacturing system, and a component that can further reduce the vibration to the exposure unit and can perform exposure using the exposure unit very suitably. Manufacturing method and pattern forming device.

本發明第1態樣,係一種基板處理裝置,具備:除振台,設在設置面上;曝光單元,設在該除振台上、對被供應之基板進行曝光處理;以及處理單元,設在該設置面上、並以與該曝光單元非接觸之獨立狀態設置,對該曝光單元進行處理。 A first aspect of the present invention is a substrate processing apparatus including: a vibration isolation table provided on a setting surface; an exposure unit disposed on the vibration isolation table to perform exposure processing on a supplied substrate; and a processing unit configured to The exposure unit is set on the setting surface and in an independent state without contact with the exposure unit, and the exposure unit is processed.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該處理單元包含位置調整單元,此位置調整單元系調整供應至該曝光單元之該基板於寬度方向之位置;該位置調整單元,具有:基台,設在該設置面上;寬度移動機構,係設在該基台上,相對該基台使該基板移動於該基板之寬度方向;以及固定輥,設在該基台上,係將以該寬度移動機構進行位置調整後之該基板引導向該曝光單元,且相對該基台之位置被固定。 In the aforementioned substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the processing unit includes a position adjustment unit that adjusts the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit in the width direction; the position adjustment unit has: a base A table is provided on the setting surface; a width moving mechanism is provided on the base table, and the substrate is moved in the width direction of the substrate relative to the base table; and a fixed roller is provided on the base table, and After the position adjustment by the width moving mechanism, the substrate is guided to the exposure unit, and the position relative to the base is fixed.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,可進一步具備:第1基板檢測部,固定在該基台上,檢測備供應至該固定輥之該基板於寬度方向之位置;以及控制部,係根據該第1基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該寬度移 動機構,以將被供應至該固定輥之該基板於寬度方向之位置修正至第1目標位置。 The aforementioned substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention may further include: a first substrate detecting section fixed on the base, detecting a position of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller in a width direction; and a control section, Controlling the width shift according to the detection result of the first substrate detecting section A moving mechanism to correct the position of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller in the width direction to the first target position.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該位置調整單元可進一步具有調整該固定輥相對該曝光單元之位置的輥位置調整機構;並進一步具備:第2基板檢測部,係固定在該除振台上,檢測被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置;以及控制部,係根據該第2基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該輥位置調整機構,以將被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置修正至第2目標位置。 According to the first aspect of the substrate processing apparatus of the present invention, the position adjustment unit may further include a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts the position of the fixed roller relative to the exposure unit; and further includes: a second substrate detection unit, which is fixed at On the vibration isolation table, the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit is detected; and the control unit controls the roller position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit so as to be supplied to the exposure unit. The position of the substrate is corrected to the second target position.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,可其進一步具備:按壓機構,係對從該位置調整單元往該曝光單元供應之該基板進行按壓,以賦予張力;第2基板檢測部,係設於該除振台上,檢測被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置;以及控制部,根據該第2基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該按壓機構,以調整對該基板之按壓量。 The aforementioned substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention may further include: a pressing mechanism for pressing the substrate supplied from the position adjustment unit to the exposure unit to impart tension; and a second substrate detection section for providing The position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit is detected on the vibration isolation table; and the control unit controls the pressing mechanism according to the detection result of the second substrate detection unit to adjust the amount of pressing on the substrate.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該處理單元包含驅動該曝光單元之驅動單元;該曝光單元,具有保持照明光照明之光罩的光罩保持構件、與支承來自該光罩之投影光所投射之該基板的基板支承構件;該驅動單元,具有為使該光罩往掃描方向移動而驅動該光罩保持構件的光罩側驅動部、與為使該基板往掃描方向移動而驅動該基板支承構件的基板側驅動部。 The substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, wherein the processing unit includes a driving unit that drives the exposure unit; the exposure unit includes a photomask holding member that holds a photomask illuminated by the illumination light, and supports from the photomask A substrate supporting member of the substrate projected by the projection light; the driving unit includes a mask-side driving portion that drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and moves the substrate in the scanning direction The substrate-side driving portion of the substrate supporting member is driven.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該曝光單元,具有支承該光罩保持構件之第1框架、與支承該基板支承構件之第2框架;該除振台,包含設在該設置面與該第1框架之間的第1除振台、與設在該設 置面與該第2框架之間的第2除振台。 In the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the exposure unit includes a first frame supporting the mask holding member and a second frame supporting the substrate supporting member; and the vibration isolation table includes The first vibration isolator between the installation surface and the first frame, and A second vibration isolator between the mounting surface and the second frame.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該曝光單元具有支承該光罩保持構件及該基板支承構件的框架;該除振台係設在該設置面與該框架之間。 In the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the exposure unit includes a frame supporting the mask holding member and the substrate supporting member; and the vibration isolation table is provided between the installation surface and the frame.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件係保持具有以第1軸為中心之第1曲率半徑之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,沿著以第2軸為中心之第2曲率半徑的支承面支承該基板;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該基板支承構件,使該基板往掃描方向移動。 In the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first curvature radius centered on the first axis; The mask holding member is driven by rotation to move the mask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member supports the substrate along a supporting surface with a second curvature radius centered on the second axis; The substrate supporting member is driven to rotate to move the substrate in the scanning direction.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件係保持具有成平面之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由直線驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,沿著以第2軸為中心之第2曲率半徑的支承面支承該基板;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該基板支承構件,使該基板往掃描方向移動。 In the aforementioned substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the photomask holding member holds the photomask having a flat photomask surface; and the photomask-side driving section drives the photomask holding member in a straight line, Moving the photomask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member supports the substrate along a supporting surface with a second radius of curvature centered on the second axis; and the substrate-side driving section drives the substrate supporting member to rotate so that The substrate moves in the scanning direction.

本發明第1態樣之前述基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件,係保持具有以第1軸為中心之第1曲率半徑之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,具有將該基板之掃描方向的兩側支承為可旋轉之一對支承輥,以使該基板具有平面;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該一對支承輥,使該基板往掃描方向移動。 In the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first curvature radius centered on the first axis; the mask-side driving section, The photomask holding member is rotated to drive the photomask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member has a pair of support rollers that support both sides of the substrate in the scanning direction to be rotatable so that the substrate has a flat surface. ; The substrate-side driving section drives the pair of support rollers to rotate the substrate in the scanning direction by rotating.

本發明第2態樣,係一種元件製造系統,具備:本發明第1態樣之基板處理裝置、將該基板供應至該基板處理裝置的基板供應裝置、 以及回收經該基板處理裝置處理後之該基板的基板回收裝置。 A second aspect of the present invention is a component manufacturing system including the substrate processing apparatus of the first aspect of the present invention, a substrate supply apparatus that supplies the substrate to the substrate processing apparatus, And a substrate recovery device that recovers the substrate processed by the substrate processing device.

本發明第2態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該基板供應裝置,具有:第1軸承部,該基板被捲繞成捲筒狀之供應用捲筒被支承為可旋轉;第1升降機構,使該第1軸承部升降;進入角度檢測部,供檢測從該供應用捲筒送出之該基板對該基板將被捲繞之第1輥之進入角度;以及控制部,根據該進入角度檢測部之檢測結果控制該第1升降機構,以將該進入角度修正至目標進入角度。 According to the second aspect of the present invention, in the component manufacturing system, the substrate supply device includes a first bearing portion, and the substrate is rotatably supported by a supply roll wound in a roll shape; and a first lifting mechanism. To raise and lower the first bearing portion; an entering angle detecting unit for detecting an entering angle of the substrate sent from the supply reel to the first roller to which the substrate is to be wound; and a control unit detecting based on the entering angle The detection result of the control unit controls the first lifting mechanism to correct the entry angle to the target entry angle.

本發明第2態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該基板回收裝置具有:第2軸承部,將經該基板處理裝置處理之處理後之該基板所捲繞之回收用捲筒支承為可旋轉;第2升降機構,使該第2軸承部升降;排出角度檢測部,係檢測該基板相對往該回收用捲筒送出之該基板所捲繞之第2輥的排出角度;以及控制部,根據該排出角度檢測部之檢測結果控制該第2升降機構,以將該排出角度修正至目標排出角度。 In the aforementioned component manufacturing system according to a second aspect of the present invention, the substrate recovery device includes a second bearing unit that rotatably supports a recovery roll wound on the substrate after being processed by the substrate processing device. A second lifting mechanism that raises and lowers the second bearing portion; a discharge angle detection portion that detects a discharge angle of the substrate relative to a second roller wound around the substrate sent to the recycling roll; and a control portion, based on The detection result of the discharge angle detection unit controls the second lifting mechanism to correct the discharge angle to a target discharge angle.

本發明第3態樣,係一種元件製造方法,包含使用本發明第1態樣之基板處理裝置對前述基板進行曝光處理的動作、與對經曝光處理之述基板進行處理據以形成前述光罩之圖案的動作。 A third aspect of the present invention is a component manufacturing method, which includes an operation of exposing the substrate using the substrate processing apparatus of the first aspect of the present invention, and processing the substrate subjected to the exposure process to form the photomask. Patterned motion.

本發明第4態樣,係一種在將長條之可撓性片狀基板往長度方向搬送之同時、於該片狀基板上之既定位置形成圖案,其具備:圖案化裝置,此圖案化裝置具備包含用以將該片狀基板沿既定搬送路徑往長度方向搬送之複數個引導輥的搬送部、與設在該搬送路徑之一部分用以在該片狀基板表面之該既定位置形成該圖案的圖案形成部;除振裝置,設在設置該圖案化裝置之基台面與該圖案化裝置之間;位置調整裝置,係與該圖案 化裝置分別獨立的設在該基台面,包含用以朝該圖案化裝置之該搬送部送出該片狀基板之引導輥,並在與該片狀基板之長度方向正交之寬度方向調整該片狀基板之位置;基板誤差測量部,係在該搬送路徑中相對該圖案形成部之上游側,測量該片狀基板於該寬度方向之位置變化、姿勢變化、或與該片狀基板之變形相關之變化資訊;以及控制裝置,根據該變化資訊控制該位置調整裝置。 According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, a pattern is formed at a predetermined position on the sheet-like substrate while the long flexible sheet-like substrate is being transported in the longitudinal direction, and includes: a patterning device, and the patterning device A transport unit including a plurality of guide rollers for transporting the sheet substrate along a predetermined transport path in a longitudinal direction, and a portion provided on a part of the transport path for forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate A pattern forming section; a vibration-removing device provided between a base surface on which the patterning device is provided and the patterning device; a position adjusting device connected to the pattern The forming devices are separately provided on the base surface, and include guide rollers for sending the sheet substrate toward the conveying section of the patterning device, and adjust the sheet in a width direction orthogonal to the length direction of the sheet substrate. The position of the substrate; the substrate error measurement unit measures the position change, posture change of the sheet substrate in the width direction, or the deformation of the sheet substrate in the width direction relative to the pattern forming portion. Change information; and a control device that controls the position adjustment device according to the change information.

本發明第4態樣之前述圖案形成裝置,其中,該基板誤差測量部可藉由檢測該片狀基板之寬度方向之邊緣、或形成在該片狀基板上之標記,據以測量該變化資訊。 In the aforementioned pattern forming apparatus according to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the substrate error measuring unit can measure the change information by detecting an edge in the width direction of the sheet substrate or a mark formed on the sheet substrate. .

本發明第4態樣之前述圖案形成裝置,其中,該基板誤差測量部係設在該圖案化裝置及該位置調整裝置中之至少一方。 According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the pattern forming apparatus, the substrate error measuring section is provided in at least one of the patterning apparatus and the position adjusting apparatus.

本發明第5態樣,係一種圖案形成裝置,在將長條之可撓性片狀基板往長度方向搬送之同時、於該片狀基板上之既定位置形成圖案,其具備:圖案化裝置,此圖案化裝置具備包含用以將該片狀基板沿既定搬送路徑往長度方向搬送之複數個引導輥的搬送部、與設在該搬送路徑之一部分用以在該片狀基板表面之該既定位置形成該圖案的圖案形成部;除振裝置,設在設置該圖案化裝置之基台面與該圖案化裝置之間;位置調整裝置,係與該圖案化裝置分別獨立的設在該基台面,包含用以朝該圖案化裝置之該搬送部送出該片狀基板之引導輥,並在與該片狀基板之長度方向正交之寬度方向調整該片狀基板之位置;位置誤差測量部,測量關於該圖案化裝置與該位置調整裝置之相對位置變化之變化資訊;以及控制裝置,根據該變化資訊控制該位置調整裝置。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is a patterning device that forms a pattern at a predetermined position on a sheet-like substrate while conveying a long flexible sheet-like substrate in a longitudinal direction, and includes: a patterning device, The patterning device includes a conveying unit including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate along a predetermined conveying path in a lengthwise direction, and the predetermined position provided on a part of the conveying path on the surface of the sheet substrate. A pattern forming portion for forming the pattern; a vibration-removing device is provided between the base surface on which the patterning device is provided and the patterning device; a position adjusting device is provided on the base surface independently of the patterning device, and includes A guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the conveying section of the patterning device, and adjusting the position of the sheet substrate in a width direction orthogonal to the length direction of the sheet substrate; a position error measuring section measures Change information of a relative position change of the patterning device and the position adjustment device; and a control device that controls the position adjustment device according to the change information.

本發明第5態樣之前述圖案形成裝置,可具備設在該圖案化裝置內,於該搬送路徑中相對該圖案形成部之上游側,在該長度方向有既定張力的狀態下,以使該片狀基板之該搬送路徑彎折之方式配置之可傾斜的調整輥;該控制裝置係根據該變化資訊使該調整輥傾斜,據以調整搬送至圖案形成部之片狀基板之寬度方向位置。 The pattern forming apparatus according to a fifth aspect of the present invention may be provided in the patterning apparatus, and on the upstream side of the transport path with respect to the pattern forming section, under a state of a predetermined tension in the longitudinal direction, so that the A tiltable adjustment roller arranged in a manner that the conveying path of the sheet substrate is bent; the control device tilts the adjustment roller according to the change information to adjust the width direction position of the sheet substrate conveyed to the pattern forming portion.

本發明第6態樣,係一種元件製造系統,在將長條之可撓性片狀基板往長度方向搬送之同時、對該片狀基板依序施以第1處理、第2處理,其具備:第1處理單元,設於既定之基台面,包含用以將該片狀基板沿既定搬送路徑往長度方向搬送之複數個輥,對該該片狀基板施以該第1處理;第2處理單元,設於該基台面,包含將從該第1處理單元送來之該片狀基板沿既定搬送路徑往長度方向搬送之複數個輥,對該片狀基板施以該第2處理;防振裝置,用以隔絕或抑制該基台面與該第1處理單元間之振動傳遞、或該基台面與該第2處理單元間之振動傳遞、或該第1處理單元與該第2處理單元間之振動傳遞;變化測量部,係測量該第1處理單元與該第2處理單元之相對位置變化、或與從該第1處理單元搬送至該第2處理單元之該片狀基板之位置變化相關之變化資訊;以及位置調整裝置,根據該變化資訊調整搬入該第2處理單元內之該片狀基板在與長度方向正交之寬度方向之位置。 A sixth aspect of the present invention is a component manufacturing system that, while conveying a long flexible sheet substrate in a lengthwise direction, sequentially performs a first treatment and a second treatment on the sheet substrate, and the device includes: : The first processing unit is provided on a predetermined base surface, and includes a plurality of rollers for transporting the sheet substrate along a predetermined transport path in a length direction, and applying the first treatment to the sheet substrate; the second treatment The unit is provided on the base surface, and includes a plurality of rollers that transport the sheet substrate sent from the first processing unit along a predetermined transport path in a longitudinal direction, and applies the second treatment to the sheet substrate; A device for isolating or suppressing vibration transmission between the abutment surface and the first processing unit, or vibration transmission between the abutment surface and the second processing unit, or between the first processing unit and the second processing unit Vibration transmission; The change measurement unit measures changes in the relative position of the first processing unit and the second processing unit, or is related to changes in the position of the sheet-like substrate transferred from the first processing unit to the second processing unit Change information; and position adjustment The device adjusts the position of the sheet substrate carried into the second processing unit in the width direction orthogonal to the length direction according to the change information.

本發明第6態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該第2處理單元可包含為在該片狀基板之長度方向形成電子元件用圖案,而對形成在該片狀基板表面之光感應層投射對應該圖案之光能的曝光裝置,或藉由含有導電材料、隔絕材料、半導體材料中任一種之油墨之塗布以在該片狀基板表 面描繪該圖案的印刷裝置中任一者之圖案化裝置。 According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the component manufacturing system, the second processing unit may include a pattern for forming an electronic component in a longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate, and projecting a light-sensing layer formed on a surface of the sheet substrate. An exposure device corresponding to the light energy of a pattern, or by coating an ink containing any of a conductive material, an insulating material, and a semiconductor material on the surface of the sheet substrate. A patterning device for any one of the printing devices that draws the pattern.

本發明第6態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該第1處理單元係由實施與藉由該圖案化裝置對該片狀基板上施以處理之前步驟相當之處理的單獨或複數個前處理裝置構成;該位置調整裝置,係設在該片狀基板之搬送路上設置在該圖案化裝置前一個之該前處理裝置內、或該前一個之前處理裝置與該圖案化裝置之間。 In the aforementioned component manufacturing system according to a sixth aspect of the present invention, the first processing unit is a single or a plurality of pre-treatments for performing processing equivalent to the step before the processing is performed on the sheet substrate by the patterning device. Device configuration; the position adjusting device is provided on the conveying path of the sheet substrate and is disposed in the pre-processing device preceding the patterning device, or between the previous pre-processing device and the patterning device.

本發明第6態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該位置調整裝置,具備將該片狀基板於長度方向彎折後引導搬送之複數個旋轉輥、使該複數個旋轉輥中之部分旋轉輥與旋轉中心軸之方向平行移動之驅動機構、以及根據以該變化測量部測量之該變化資訊控制該驅動機構之控制部。 According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the component manufacturing system, the position adjustment device includes a plurality of rotating rollers which are guided and conveyed after the sheet substrate is bent in the longitudinal direction, and a part of the plurality of rotating rollers is rotated. A drive mechanism that moves in parallel with the direction of the rotation center axis, and a control unit that controls the drive mechanism based on the change information measured by the change measurement unit.

本發明第6態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該位置調整裝置,具備將該片狀基板於長度方向彎折後引導搬送之複數個旋轉輥、使該複數個旋轉輥中之部分旋轉輥之旋轉中心軸傾斜之驅動部、以及根據以該變化測量部測量之該變化資訊控制該驅動部之控制部。 According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the component manufacturing system, the position adjustment device includes a plurality of rotating rollers which are guided and conveyed after the sheet substrate is bent in the longitudinal direction, and a part of the plurality of rotating rollers is rotated. A driving section having a tilted rotation center axis, and a control section for controlling the driving section based on the change information measured by the change measuring section.

本發明第6態樣之前述元件製造系統,其中,該變化測量部,包含配置在該第1處理單元與該第2處理單元間之該片狀基板之搬送路,將在與該長度方向正交之該片狀基板之寬度方向相關之傾斜變化作為該變化資訊加以檢測之感測器。 In the aforementioned component manufacturing system according to a sixth aspect of the present invention, the change measurement section includes a conveyance path of the sheet substrate disposed between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, and will be positively aligned with the longitudinal direction. The change in the inclination related to the width direction of the sheet substrate is used as a sensor for detecting the change information.

依據本發明之前述各態樣,可提供一種能更為降低對曝光單元之振動,而能非常適合地進行使用曝光單元之曝光的基板處理裝置、元件製造系統、元件製造方法及圖案形成裝置。 According to the aforementioned aspects of the present invention, it is possible to provide a substrate processing apparatus, a component manufacturing system, a component manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus that can further reduce the vibration to the exposure unit and can perform the exposure using the exposure unit very suitably.

1‧‧‧元件製造系統 1‧‧‧component manufacturing system

2‧‧‧基板供應裝置 2‧‧‧ substrate supply device

4‧‧‧基板回收裝置 4‧‧‧ substrate recovery device

5‧‧‧上位控制裝置(控制部) 5‧‧‧ Higher-level control device (control section)

11‧‧‧光罩保持機構 11‧‧‧Mask holding mechanism

12、12a‧‧‧基板支承機構(基板搬送機構) 12, 12a‧‧‧ substrate support mechanism (substrate transfer mechanism)

13、13a‧‧‧照明機構 13, 13a‧‧‧lighting institution

16‧‧‧下位控制裝置(控制部) 16‧‧‧ Lower control device (control part)

21‧‧‧光罩載台 21‧‧‧Mask stage

21a‧‧‧光罩保持圓筒 21a‧‧‧mask holding cylinder

22‧‧‧光罩側驅動部 22‧‧‧Mask side drive

23‧‧‧傳遞構件 23‧‧‧Transfer component

25‧‧‧旋轉筒 25‧‧‧ rotating tube

25a‧‧‧旋轉筒之端部側區域 25a‧‧‧End side area of rotating barrel

25c‧‧‧標尺板 25c‧‧‧ Ruler board

26‧‧‧基板側驅動部 26‧‧‧ Substrate-side driver

28‧‧‧引導輥 28‧‧‧Guide roller

61‧‧‧第1光學系 61‧‧‧The first optical system

62‧‧‧第2光學系 62‧‧‧Second Optical Department

63‧‧‧投影視野光闌 63‧‧‧ projection field diaphragm

64‧‧‧焦點修正光學構件 64‧‧‧ Focus Correction Optical Component

65‧‧‧像移動用光學構件 65‧‧‧Image moving optical components

66‧‧‧倍率修正用光學構件 66‧‧‧Optical member for magnification correction

67‧‧‧旋轉修正機構 67‧‧‧rotation correction mechanism

70‧‧‧第1偏向構件 70‧‧‧The first deflection member

71‧‧‧第1透鏡群 71‧‧‧1st lens group

72‧‧‧第1凹面鏡 72‧‧‧ 1st concave mirror

80‧‧‧第2偏向構件 80‧‧‧The second deflection member

81‧‧‧第2透鏡群 81‧‧‧ 2nd lens group

82‧‧‧第2凹面鏡 82‧‧‧ 2nd concave mirror

93‧‧‧引導輥 93‧‧‧Guide roller

94‧‧‧驅動輥(絞盤輥) 94‧‧‧Drive roller (capstan roller)

111‧‧‧第1軸承部 111‧‧‧The first bearing section

112‧‧‧第1升降機構 112‧‧‧The first lifting mechanism

114‧‧‧進入角度檢測部 114‧‧‧ Entered the angle detection section

120、120a‧‧‧位置調整單元 120, 120a‧‧‧Position adjustment unit

121、121a~121c‧‧‧曝光單元 121, 121a ~ 121c‧‧‧ exposure unit

121d‧‧‧防塵套 121d‧‧‧dust cover

122‧‧‧驅動單元 122‧‧‧Drive unit

123‧‧‧第1基板檢測部 123‧‧‧The first substrate inspection section

124‧‧‧第2基板檢測部 124‧‧‧Second substrate inspection section

125‧‧‧基台 125‧‧‧ abutment

126‧‧‧固定輥 126‧‧‧fixed roller

127‧‧‧搬送輥 127‧‧‧ transport roller

128‧‧‧基台位置調整機構 128‧‧‧ abutment position adjustment mechanism

130‧‧‧按壓機構 130‧‧‧Pressing mechanism

131‧‧‧除振台 131‧‧‧Damper

131a‧‧‧第1除振台 131a‧‧‧The first vibration isolation table

131b‧‧‧第2除振台 131b‧‧‧Second vibration isolator

132‧‧‧裝置框架 132‧‧‧device frame

132a‧‧‧第1框架 132a‧‧‧Frame 1

132b‧‧‧第2框架 132b‧‧‧Frame 2

135‧‧‧第1下方框架 135‧‧‧The first lower frame

135a‧‧‧脚部 135a‧‧‧foot

135b‧‧‧上面部 135b‧‧‧upper face

136‧‧‧第1上方框架 136‧‧‧The first upper frame

136a‧‧‧脚部 136a‧‧‧foot

136b‧‧‧上面部 136b‧‧‧upper face

137‧‧‧臂部 137‧‧‧arm

139‧‧‧下面部 139‧‧‧ lower part

140‧‧‧軸承部 140‧‧‧bearing department

141‧‧‧空氣軸承 141‧‧‧air bearing

143‧‧‧保持構件 143‧‧‧ holding member

145‧‧‧墊圈構件 145‧‧‧washer member

146‧‧‧支柱框架 146‧‧‧ Pillar Framework

151‧‧‧按壓構件 151‧‧‧Pressing member

152‧‧‧升降機構 152‧‧‧Lifting mechanism

160‧‧‧位置調整單元 160‧‧‧Position adjustment unit

161‧‧‧第2軸承部 161‧‧‧Second bearing section

162‧‧‧第2升降機構 162‧‧‧The second lifting mechanism

164‧‧‧排出角度檢測部 164‧‧‧Exhaust angle detection section

165‧‧‧第3基板檢測部 165‧‧‧3rd substrate inspection section

167‧‧‧搬送輥 167‧‧‧Transport roller

170‧‧‧基台 170‧‧‧ abutment

180‧‧‧裝置框架 180‧‧‧ Device frame

181‧‧‧裝置框架之下面部 181‧‧‧Face under the device frame

182‧‧‧軸承部 182‧‧‧bearing department

183‧‧‧中間部 183‧‧‧Middle

184‧‧‧脚部 184‧‧‧foot

185‧‧‧上面部 185‧‧‧upper face

186‧‧‧臂部 186‧‧‧arm

196‧‧‧驅動輥 196‧‧‧Drive roller

197‧‧‧空氣載台 197‧‧‧air carrier

198‧‧‧1/4波長板 198‧‧‧1 / 4 wave plate

202a、202b‧‧‧檢測部 202a, 202b‧‧‧Testing Department

204‧‧‧下位控制裝置 204‧‧‧ Lower control device

206‧‧‧致動器 206‧‧‧Actuator

207b‧‧‧本體框架 207b‧‧‧Ontology framework

210‧‧‧曝光頭 210‧‧‧ exposure head

212‧‧‧下位控制裝置 212‧‧‧lower control device

214‧‧‧基板調整部 214‧‧‧Substrate adjustment section

214a‧‧‧軸承 214a‧‧‧bearing

208‧‧‧第2基板檢測部 208‧‧‧Second substrate inspection section

216‧‧‧照射系 216‧‧‧ Irradiation

218‧‧‧受光系 218‧‧‧Light receiving system

220‧‧‧投光部 220‧‧‧light projection department

222‧‧‧柱面透鏡 222‧‧‧ cylindrical lens

224、226‧‧‧反射鏡 224, 226‧‧‧Mirror

228‧‧‧成像光學系 228‧‧‧ Department of Imaging Optics

230‧‧‧攝影元件 230‧‧‧Photographic element

230a‧‧‧拍攝區域 230a‧‧‧shooting area

234‧‧‧相對位置檢測部 234‧‧‧ Relative position detection unit

236‧‧‧第1檢測部 236‧‧‧The first detection department

238‧‧‧第2檢測部 238‧‧‧Second Detection Section

240a、240b‧‧‧投光部 240a, 240b ‧‧‧light projection department

242a、242b‧‧‧受光部 242a, 242b‧‧‧ Light receiving section

244‧‧‧光二極體 244‧‧‧photodiode

252‧‧‧集光透鏡 252‧‧‧ collection lens

254‧‧‧描繪用光學元件(光變調器) 254‧‧‧Drawing optical element (light modulator)

256‧‧‧吸收體 256‧‧‧ Absorber

258‧‧‧準直透鏡 258‧‧‧Collimating lens

260‧‧‧反射鏡 260‧‧‧Reflector

262‧‧‧柱面透鏡 262‧‧‧ cylindrical lens

264‧‧‧聚焦透鏡 264‧‧‧Focus lens

266‧‧‧反射鏡 266‧‧‧Reflector

268‧‧‧多面鏡(光掃描構件) 268‧‧‧ polygon mirror (light scanning member)

270‧‧‧反射鏡 270‧‧‧Reflector

272‧‧‧f-θ透鏡 272‧‧‧f-θ lens

274‧‧‧柱面透鏡 274‧‧‧ cylindrical lens

A3‧‧‧圖案形成區域 A3‧‧‧ pattern formation area

A4‧‧‧圖案非形成區域 A4‧‧‧pattern non-formation area

A7‧‧‧曝光區域 A7‧‧‧Exposure area

AM1、AM2‧‧‧對準顯微鏡 AM1, AM2‧‧‧ aiming microscope

AR1、AR2‧‧‧調整輥 AR1, AR2‧‧‧‧Adjustment roller

AX1‧‧‧旋轉中心線 AX1‧‧‧rotation centerline

AX2‧‧‧旋轉軸 AX2‧‧‧rotation axis

AX3a、AX3b‧‧‧旋轉軸 AX3a, AX3b‧‧‧rotation axis

BT1~BT3‧‧‧處理槽 BT1 ~ BT3‧‧‧‧Treatment tank

BX2‧‧‧第2光軸 BX2‧‧‧ 2nd optical axis

BX3‧‧‧第3光軸 BX3‧‧‧3rd optical axis

CL‧‧‧中心面 CL‧‧‧ center plane

CUr、CUs‧‧‧線圈單元 CUr, CUs‧‧‧ Coil Unit

DR1‧‧‧壓輥 DR1‧‧‧Press roller

DR2‧‧‧塗布輥 DR2‧‧‧Coating roller

DT1、DT2‧‧‧變位感測器 DT1, DT2‧‧‧Position Sensor

DU1~DU5‧‧‧描繪單元 DU1 ~ DU5‧‧‧Drawing unit

E‧‧‧設置面 E‧‧‧Setting surface

ECV‧‧‧調溫室 ECV‧‧‧Adjust greenhouse

EH‧‧‧讀取頭 EH‧‧‧Read head

EL1‧‧‧照明光束 EL1‧‧‧illuminating beam

EL2‧‧‧投影光束 EL2‧‧‧ Projected Beam

EPC1、EPC2、EPC3、EPC3a‧‧‧邊緣位置控制器 EPC1, EPC2, EPC3, EPC3a‧‧‧Edge Position Controller

FR1‧‧‧供應用捲筒 FR1‧‧‧ supply reel

FR2‧‧‧回收用捲筒 FR2‧‧‧Recycling roll

Gp1‧‧‧塗布機構 Gp1‧‧‧coating mechanism

Gp2‧‧‧乾燥機構 Gp2‧‧‧drying mechanism

HA1‧‧‧加熱室 HA1‧‧‧Heating room

HA2‧‧‧冷卻室 HA2‧‧‧cooling room

IL‧‧‧照明光學系 IL‧‧‧ Department of Lighting Optics

IL1~IL6‧‧‧照明模組 IL1 ~ IL6‧‧‧Lighting Module

ILa1~ILa6‧‧‧照明模組 ILa1 ~ ILa6‧‧‧Lighting Module

IR1~IR6‧‧‧照明區域 IR1 ~ IR6‧‧‧Lighting area

Ks‧‧‧對準標記 Ks‧‧‧ alignment mark

M、MB‧‧‧光罩 M, MB‧‧‧Photomask

MA‧‧‧圓筒光罩 MA‧‧‧Cylinder Mask

MUr、MUs‧‧‧磁石單元 MUr, MUs‧‧‧magnet unit

NA‧‧‧驅動輥 NA‧‧‧Drive roller

P‧‧‧基板 P‧‧‧ substrate

P2‧‧‧支承面 P2‧‧‧bearing surface

P3~P6‧‧‧第1~第4反射面 P3 ~ P6‧‧‧‧ 1st ~ 4th reflecting surface

P7‧‧‧中間像面 P7‧‧‧Middle image plane

PA1~PA6‧‧‧投影區域 PA1 ~ PA6‧‧‧‧ projection area

PBS‧‧‧偏光分束器 PBS‧‧‧polarized beam splitter

R2、R3、R4、R5、R6、R7‧‧‧驅動輥 R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7‧‧‧ drive rollers

Rs3‧‧‧引導輥 Rs3‧‧‧Guide roller

RT‧‧‧旋轉子 RT‧‧‧ Rotator

RT1、RT2、RT3‧‧‧張力輥 RT1, RT2, RT3 ‧‧‧ tension roller

PA1~PA6‧‧‧投影區域 PA1 ~ PA6‧‧‧‧ projection area

PL‧‧‧投影光學系 PL‧‧‧ Projection Optics

PL1~PL6‧‧‧投影模組 PL1 ~ PL6‧‧‧‧Projection Module

Rfa‧‧‧曲率半徑 Rfa‧‧‧curvature radius

SG1、SG2‧‧‧變位感測器 SG1, SG2‧‧‧Position Sensor

U1~Un‧‧‧處理裝置 U1 ~ Un‧‧‧Processing device

圖1係顯示第1實施形態之元件製造系統之構成的圖。 FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of a component manufacturing system according to the first embodiment.

圖2係顯示將第1實施形態之元件製造系統加以簡化時之構成的圖。 FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a simplified configuration of the component manufacturing system of the first embodiment.

圖3係顯示第1實施形態之曝光裝置(基板處理裝置)之部分構成的圖。 FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the first embodiment.

圖4係顯示圖3所示之第1實施形態之曝光裝置之部分構成的圖。 FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of an exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 3. FIG.

圖5顯示第1實施形態之曝光單元之整體構成的圖。 FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an exposure unit according to the first embodiment.

圖6係顯示圖5所示之曝光單元之照明區域及投影區域之配置的圖。 FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the illumination area and the projection area of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 5.

圖7係顯示圖5所示之曝光單元之投影光學系之構成的圖。 FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration of a projection optical system of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 5.

圖8係顯示第1實施形態之元件製造方法的流程圖。 Fig. 8 is a flowchart showing a device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.

圖9係顯示第2實施形態之曝光裝置(基板處理裝置)之部分構成的圖。 FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to a second embodiment.

圖10係顯示圖9之第2實施形態之曝光單元之整體構成的圖。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an exposure unit according to the second embodiment of FIG. 9. FIG.

圖11係顯示第3實施形態之曝光單元之整體構成的圖。 FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an exposure unit according to a third embodiment.

圖12係顯示第4實施形態之曝光裝置之構成的圖。 Fig. 12 is a diagram showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to a fourth embodiment.

圖13係在圖12所示之曝光裝置內被搬送之基板從+Z方向側觀察時的圖。 FIG. 13 is a diagram when the substrate conveyed in the exposure apparatus shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from the + Z direction side.

圖14係在圖13所示之位置調整單元側之最後輥與曝光單元側之最初輥之間被搬送之基板P從-Y方向側觀察時的圖。 FIG. 14 is a diagram when the substrate P transferred between the last roller on the position adjustment unit side and the first roller on the exposure unit side shown in FIG. 13 is viewed from the −Y direction side.

圖15係被圖12所示之旋轉筒搬送之基板從-X方向側觀察時的圖。 FIG. 15 is a diagram when the substrate carried by the rotating cylinder shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from the −X direction side.

圖16係顯示圖12所示之基板調整部之構成的圖。 FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a substrate adjustment section shown in FIG. 12.

圖17A係顯示圖12所示之第2基板檢測部之構成的圖、圖17B係顯示以第2基板檢測部對基板照射之光束的圖、圖17C係顯示以第2基板檢測部受光之光束的圖。 FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the configuration of the second substrate detection unit shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 17B is a diagram showing a light beam irradiated to the substrate by the second substrate detection unit, and FIG. 17C is a light beam received by the second substrate detection unit Illustration.

圖18係顯示圖12所示之相對位置檢測部之構成的圖。 FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of a relative position detection unit shown in FIG. 12.

圖19係顯示以圖12所示之曝光頭於基板上掃描之點光之掃描線及對準顯微鏡的圖。 FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a scanning line of a point light scanned on a substrate with the exposure head shown in FIG. 12 and a view aligned with a microscope.

圖20係顯示圖12所示之曝光頭之描繪單元之構成的圖。 FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a drawing unit of the exposure head shown in FIG. 12.

針對本發明各態樣之基板處理裝置、元件製造系統、元件製造方法及圖案形成裝置,揭示較佳實施形態,並參照所附圖式一邊詳細說明如下。又,本發明之各態樣並不限定於此等實施形態,亦包含各種變化或加以改良者。也就是說,以下記載之構成要素中,包含當業者容易想到之物、以及實質同一之物,以下記載之構成要素可適當地加以組合。此外,在不脫離本發明要旨之範圍內可進行構成要素之各種省略、置換與變更。 Preferred embodiments of the substrate processing apparatus, the component manufacturing system, the component manufacturing method, and the pattern forming apparatus according to various aspects of the present invention will be described below, with reference to the accompanying drawings and the following detailed description. In addition, aspects of the present invention are not limited to these embodiments, and include various changes or improvements. That is to say, the constituent elements described below include things that are easily conceivable by the practitioner and those that are substantially the same, and the constituent elements described below can be appropriately combined. In addition, various omissions, substitutions, and changes of constituent elements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

〔第1實施形態〕 [First Embodiment]

第1實施形態之基板處理裝置,係對基板施以曝光處理之曝光裝置,曝光裝置中組裝有對曝光後之基板施以各種處理以製造電子元件之元件製造系統。首先,說明元件製造系統。 The substrate processing apparatus of the first embodiment is an exposure apparatus that applies an exposure process to a substrate. The exposure apparatus is equipped with a component manufacturing system that applies various processes to the exposed substrate to manufacture electronic components. First, a component manufacturing system will be described.

<元件製造系統> <Component manufacturing system>

圖1係顯示第1實施形態之元件製造系統1之構成的圖。圖1所示之元件製造系統1,係製造作為電子元件(有時亦稱元件)之可撓性顯示器之生產線(可撓性顯示器生產線)。作為可撓性顯示器,例如有有機EL顯示器等。此元件製造系統1,係從將可撓性基板(片狀基板)P捲繞成捲筒狀之供應用捲筒FR1送出該基板P,並對被送出之基板P連續的施以各種處理後,將處 理後之基板P以回收用捲筒FR2加以捲繞之所謂的捲對捲(Roll to Roll)方式。第1實施形態之元件製造系統1中,顯示了薄膜狀之片材基板P從供應用捲筒FR1送出,從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P依序經n台之處理裝置U1、U2、U3、U4、U5、…Un後,捲繞於回收用捲筒FR2為止之例。以下,首先說明作為元件製造系統1之處理對象的基板P。 FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a component manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment. The component manufacturing system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a production line (flexible display production line) for manufacturing flexible displays as electronic components (sometimes also referred to as components). Examples of the flexible display include an organic EL display. This component manufacturing system 1 is configured to send out the substrate P from a supply roll FR1 in which a flexible substrate (sheet substrate) P is wound into a roll, and to continuously perform various processes on the substrate P to be sent out. , Will The processed substrate P is wound by a so-called roll-to-roll method in which the reel FR2 is wound. In the component manufacturing system 1 of the first embodiment, it is shown that the film-like sheet substrate P is sent out from the supply roll FR1, and the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is sequentially passed through n processing units U1, U2. Examples after U3, U4, U5, ..., Un are wound around the reel FR2. Hereinafter, the substrate P as a processing target of the element manufacturing system 1 will be described first.

基板P,係由例如樹脂薄膜、不鏽鋼等之金屬或合金構成之箔(foil)等。樹脂薄膜之材質,可使用包含例如聚乙烯樹脂、聚丙烯樹脂、聚酯樹脂、乙烯乙烯基共聚物樹脂、聚氯乙烯樹脂、纖維素樹脂、聚醯胺樹脂、聚醯亞胺樹脂、聚碳酸酯樹脂、聚苯乙烯樹脂、聚乙烯醇樹脂等材料中之一種或二種以上者。此外,基板P之厚度及剛性(楊氏係數),只要是在搬送時不會於基板P產生因彎折造成之折痕及非可逆的皺褶之範圍即可。在製作作為電子元件之可撓性顯示器面板、觸控面板、濾光片(color filter)、電磁波防止濾波片等之情形時,係使用厚度25μm~200μm程度之PET(聚對酞酸乙二酯)或PEN(聚萘二甲酸乙二醇酯)等之樹脂片材。 The substrate P is a foil made of a metal or an alloy such as a resin film and stainless steel. For the material of the resin film, for example, polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyester resin, ethylene vinyl copolymer resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, cellulose resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, and polycarbonate can be used. One or two or more kinds of materials such as ester resin, polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl alcohol resin. In addition, the thickness and rigidity (Young's coefficient) of the substrate P may be in a range that does not cause creases and irreversible wrinkles due to bending on the substrate P during transportation. When manufacturing flexible display panels, touch panels, color filters, electromagnetic wave prevention filters, and other electronic components, PET (polyethylene terephthalate) with a thickness of 25 μm to 200 μm is used. ) Or PEN (polyethylene naphthalate) and other resin sheets.

基板P,以選擇例如熱膨脹係數顯著不大、可實質忽視在對基板P實施之各種處理中因受熱而產生之變形量者較佳。又,可於作為基材之樹脂薄膜中混入例如氧化鈦、氧化鋅、氧化鋁、氧化矽等之無機填充物,以降低熱膨脹係數。此外,又,基板P可以是以浮製法等製造之厚度100μm程度之極薄玻璃之單層體、或於此極薄玻璃貼合上述樹脂薄膜、或鋁及銅等之箔等的積層體。 The substrate P is preferably selected such that, for example, the coefficient of thermal expansion is significantly small, and the amount of deformation caused by heat in various processes performed on the substrate P can be substantially ignored. In addition, an inorganic filler such as titanium oxide, zinc oxide, aluminum oxide, or silicon oxide can be mixed into the resin film as a base material to reduce the coefficient of thermal expansion. In addition, the substrate P may be a single-layered body of ultra-thin glass having a thickness of about 100 μm produced by a float method or the like, or a laminated body in which the above-mentioned thin resin film, a foil of aluminum, copper, or the like is bonded to the extremely thin glass.

基板P之可撓性,係指對基板P施加本身重量程度之力亦不致於產生剪斷或斷裂、而能使該基板P撓曲的性質。而可撓性亦包含因自重 程度之力而彎曲之性質。又,可撓性之程度會因基板P之材質、大小、厚度、基板P上成膜之層構造、温度、濕度及環境等而改變。無論何者,只要是在將基板P正確的捲繞於設在本實施形態之元件製造系統1內之搬送路之各種搬送用輥、旋轉筒等搬送方向轉換用構件時,不會彎折而產生摺痕、破損(產生破洞或裂開),能順暢的搬送基板P的話,皆為可撓性之範圍。 The flexibility of the substrate P refers to a property that the substrate P can be flexed without exerting a degree of weight on the substrate P without causing shear or breakage. And flexibility includes weight Degree of force and bent nature. In addition, the degree of flexibility varies depending on the material, size, and thickness of the substrate P, the layer structure of the film formed on the substrate P, temperature, humidity, and the environment. In any case, as long as the substrate P is correctly wound around various conveyance direction changing members such as the conveyance rollers and the rotating drum provided in the conveyance path provided in the component manufacturing system 1 of the present embodiment, it will not be produced by bending. Creases, breaks (cavities or cracks), and smooth transfer of the substrate P are all in the range of flexibility.

以此方式構成之基板P,被捲繞成捲筒狀而成為供應用捲筒FR1,此供應用捲筒FR1被裝著於元件製造系統1。裝有供應用捲筒FR1之元件製造系統1,對從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P反覆實施用以製造1個元件之各種處理。因此,處理後之基板P成為複數個電子元件連結之狀態。也就是說,從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P,為多面用之基板。此外,基板P亦可以是預先藉由既定前處理,將其表面予以改質而活性化者、或於表面形成用以精密圖案化之微細間隔壁構造(凹凸構造)者。 The substrate P configured in this manner is wound into a roll shape to become a supply roll FR1, and this supply roll FR1 is mounted on the component manufacturing system 1. The component manufacturing system 1 equipped with the supply roll FR1 repeatedly performs various processes for manufacturing one component on the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1. Therefore, the processed substrate P is in a state where a plurality of electronic components are connected. That is, the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is a multi-sided substrate. In addition, the substrate P may be a person whose surface is modified and activated by a predetermined pretreatment in advance, or a fine partition wall structure (concavo-convex structure) formed on the surface for precise patterning.

經處理後之基板P,處理後之基板P,被捲繞成捲筒狀作為回收用捲筒FR2加以回收。回收用捲筒FR2,被安裝於未圖示之切割裝置。裝有回收用捲筒FR2之切割裝置,將處理後之基板P分割(切割)成各個元件,據以成複數個元件。基板P之尺寸,例如,寬度方向(短邊之方向)之尺寸為10cm~2m程度、而長度方向(長條之方向)尺寸則為10m以上。當然,基板P之尺寸不限於上述尺寸。 The processed substrate P and the processed substrate P are wound into a roll shape and recovered as a recovery roll FR2. The reel FR2 is mounted on a cutting device (not shown). A cutting device equipped with a recycling roll FR2 divides (cuts) the processed substrate P into individual components, thereby forming a plurality of components. The size of the substrate P is, for example, about 10 cm to 2 m in the width direction (direction of the short side), and more than 10 m in the length direction (length direction). Of course, the size of the substrate P is not limited to the above-mentioned size.

接著,參照圖1,說明元件製造系統1。圖1,係X方向、Y方向及Z方向成正交之正交座標系。X方向,係在水平面內為基板P之搬送方向,連結供應用捲筒FR1及回收用捲筒FR2之方向。Y方向,係在水平面內與X方向正交之方向,為基板P之寬度方向。Y方向係供應用捲筒FR1及回收用捲 筒FR2之軸方向。Z方向係與X方向、Y方向正交之方向(鉛直方向)。 Next, a component manufacturing system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1. Figure 1 is an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X, Y and Z directions are orthogonal. The X direction is the direction in which the substrate P is transported in the horizontal plane, and the direction connecting the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2. The Y direction is a direction orthogonal to the X direction in the horizontal plane, and is the width direction of the substrate P. Y direction supply roll FR1 and roll for recycling The axis direction of the tube FR2. The Z direction is a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction.

元件製造系統1,具備供應基板P之基板供應裝置2、對由基板供應裝置2供應之基板P施以各種處理之處理裝置U1~Un、回收經處理裝置U1~Un施以處理之基板P之基板回收裝置4、以及控制元件製造系統1之各裝置之上位控制裝置5。 Element manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2 for supplying a substrate P, a processing device U1 to Un that performs various processes on the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2, and a method for recovering the substrate P that is processed by the processing devices U1 to Un. The substrate recovery device 4 and each device of the control element manufacturing system 1 have a higher-level control device 5.

於基板供應裝置2,以可旋轉之方式安裝供應用捲筒FR1。基板供應裝置2,具有從所安裝之供應用捲筒FR1送出基板P的驅動輥R1、與調整基板P在寬度方向(Y方向)之位置的邊緣位置控制器EPC1。驅動輥R1,一邊夾持基板P之表背兩面一邊旋轉,將基板P從供應用捲筒FR1往朝向回收用捲筒FR2之搬送方向(+X方向)送出,據以將基板P供應至處理裝置U1~Un。此時,邊緣位置控制器EPC1係以基板P在寬度方向端部(邊緣)之位置,相對目標位置在±十數μm程度範圍至±數十μm程度之範圍內之方式,使基板P移動於寬度方向,以修正基板P在寬度方向之位置。 A supply roll FR1 is rotatably mounted on the substrate supply device 2. The substrate supply device 2 includes a drive roller R1 that sends out a substrate P from a mounted supply roll FR1, and an edge position controller EPC1 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The driving roller R1 rotates while holding the front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and sends out the substrate P from the supply roll FR1 toward the conveying direction (+ X direction) of the recovery roll FR2, thereby supplying the substrate P to the process Device U1 ~ Un. At this time, the edge position controller EPC1 moves the substrate P to the position of the substrate P in the width direction end (edge) relative to the target position within a range of ± tens of μm to ± tens of μm The width direction is to correct the position of the substrate P in the width direction.

於基板回收裝置4,以可旋轉之方式裝有回收用捲筒FR2。基板回收裝置4,具有將處理後之基板P拉向回收用捲筒FR2側的驅動輥R2、與調整基板P在寬度方向(Y方向)之位置的邊緣位置控制器EPC2。基板回收裝置4,一邊以驅動輥R2夾持基板P之表背兩面一邊旋轉,將基板P拉向搬送方向,並藉由使回收用捲筒FR2旋轉,據以捲繞基板P。此時,邊緣位置控制器EPC2與邊緣位置控制器EPC1同樣構成,修正基板P在寬度方向之位置,以避免基板P之寬度方向端部(邊緣)在寬度方向產生不均。 A reel roll FR2 is rotatably mounted on the substrate recovery device 4. The substrate recovery device 4 includes a driving roller R2 that pulls the processed substrate P toward the recovery roll FR2 side, and an edge position controller EPC2 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The substrate recovery device 4 rotates while holding the front and back surfaces of the substrate P with the driving roller R2, pulls the substrate P in the conveying direction, and rotates the recovery roll FR2 to wind the substrate P accordingly. At this time, the edge position controller EPC2 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and the position of the substrate P in the width direction is corrected to prevent the width direction end (edge) of the substrate P from being uneven in the width direction.

處理裝置U1,係在從基板供應裝置2供應之基板P表面塗布感光性機能液之塗布裝置。作為感光性機能液,例如係使用光阻劑、感光 性矽烷耦合劑、UV硬化樹脂液、其他感光性鍍敷還原溶液等。處理裝置U1,從基板P之搬送方向上游側起,依序設有塗布機構Gp1與乾燥機構Gp2。塗布機構Gp1,具有捲繞基板P之壓輥DR1、與和壓輥DR1對向之塗布輥DR2。塗布機構Gp1在將所供應之基板P捲繞於壓輥DR1之狀態下,以壓輥DR1及塗布輥DR2夾持基板P。塗布機構Gp1並藉由使壓輥DR1及塗布輥DR2旋轉,一邊使基板P移動於搬送方向、一邊以塗布輥DR2塗布感光性機能液。乾燥機構Gp2吹出熱風或乾燥空氣等之乾燥用空氣以除去感光性機能液中所含之溶質(溶劑或水),使塗有感光性機能液之基板P乾燥,以在基板P上形成感光性機能層。 The processing device U1 is a coating device that applies a photosensitive functional liquid to the surface of the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2. As the photosensitive functional liquid, for example, a photoresist or a photosensitive agent is used. Silane coupling agent, UV curing resin solution, other photosensitive plating reduction solution, etc. The processing device U1 is sequentially provided with a coating mechanism Gp1 and a drying mechanism Gp2 from the upstream side in the conveying direction of the substrate P. The coating mechanism Gp1 includes a pressure roller DR1 that winds the substrate P, and a coating roller DR2 that faces the pressure roller DR1. The coating mechanism Gp1 holds the substrate P with the pressure roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2 in a state where the supplied substrate P is wound on the pressure roller DR1. The coating mechanism Gp1 rotates the pressure roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2 to apply the photosensitive functional liquid with the coating roller DR2 while moving the substrate P in the conveying direction. The drying mechanism Gp2 blows dry air such as hot air or dry air to remove the solute (solvent or water) contained in the photosensitive functional liquid, and dries the substrate P coated with the photosensitive functional liquid to form a photosensitivity on the substrate P. Functional layer.

處理裝置U2,係為了使形成在基板P表面之感光性機能層安定,而將從處理裝置U1搬送之基板P加熱至既定温度(例如,數10~120℃程度)之加熱裝置。處理裝置U2,從基板P之搬送方向上游側起依序設有加熱室HA1與冷卻室HA2。加熱室HA1,於其內部設有複數個輥及複數個空氣翻轉桿(air turn bar),複數個輥及複數個空氣翻轉桿構成基板P之搬送路徑。複數個輥以接觸基板P背面之方式設置,複數個空氣翻轉桿以非接觸狀態設於基板P之表面側。複數個輥及複數個空氣翻轉桿為加長基板P之搬送路徑,而呈蛇行狀之搬送路徑。通過加熱室HA1內之基板P,一邊沿蛇行狀之搬送路徑被搬送、一邊被加熱至既定温度。冷卻室HA2,為使在加熱室HA1加熱之基板P之温度與後製程(處理裝置U3)之環境温度一致,而將基板P冷卻至環境温度。冷卻室HA2,其內部設有複數個輥,複數個輥,與加熱室HA1同樣的,為加長基板P之搬送路徑而呈蛇行狀搬送路徑之配置。通過冷卻室HA2內之基板P,一邊沿蛇行狀之搬送路徑被搬送一邊被冷卻。於冷卻 室HA2之搬送方向下游側,設有驅動輥R3,驅動輥R3一邊夾持通過冷卻室HA2之基板P一邊旋轉,據以將基板P供應向處理裝置U3。 The processing device U2 is a heating device that heats the substrate P transferred from the processing device U1 to a predetermined temperature (for example, about several 10 to 120 ° C.) in order to stabilize the photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface of the substrate P. The processing device U2 is provided with a heating chamber HA1 and a cooling chamber HA2 in this order from the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P. The heating chamber HA1 is provided with a plurality of rollers and a plurality of air turn bars inside, and the plurality of rollers and a plurality of air turn bars constitute a conveying path of the substrate P. A plurality of rollers are provided so as to contact the back surface of the substrate P, and a plurality of air reversing levers are provided on the surface side of the substrate P in a non-contact state. The plurality of rollers and the plurality of air reversing levers are elongated conveying paths of the substrate P, and meandering conveying paths. The substrate P in the heating chamber HA1 is heated to a predetermined temperature while being conveyed along a meandering conveyance path. The cooling chamber HA2 cools the substrate P to the ambient temperature so that the temperature of the substrate P heated in the heating chamber HA1 is consistent with the ambient temperature of the post-processing (processing device U3). The cooling chamber HA2 is provided with a plurality of rollers and a plurality of rollers in the same manner as the heating chamber HA1 and is arranged in a meandering conveying path in order to lengthen the conveying path of the substrate P. The substrate P in the cooling chamber HA2 is cooled while being transported along a meandering transport path. Cooling A driving roller R3 is provided on the downstream side in the conveying direction of the chamber HA2, and the driving roller R3 rotates while holding the substrate P passing through the cooling chamber HA2, thereby supplying the substrate P to the processing device U3.

處理裝置(基板處理裝置)U3,係對從處理裝置U2供應、表面形成有感光性機能層之基板(感光基板)P,投影曝光顯示器用電路或配線等圖案之曝光裝置。詳細將留待後敘,處理裝置U3以照明光束照明穿透型之光罩M,將藉由照明光束被光罩M反射所得之投影光束投影曝光於捲繞在旋轉筒(支承筒)25之部分外周面的基板P。處理裝置U3,具有將從處理裝置U2供應之基板P送往搬送方向下游側的驅動輥R4、與調整基板P在寬度方向(Y方向)之位置的邊緣位置控制器EPC3。驅動輥R4藉由在夾持基板P之表背兩面之同時進行旋轉,將基板P送向搬送方向下游側,據以朝曝光位置供應基板P。邊緣位置控制器EPC3與邊緣位置控制器EPC1同樣構成,修正基板P在寬度方向之位置,以使在曝光位置之基板P之寬度方向成為目標位置。又,處理裝置U3具有在對曝光後基板P賦予鬆弛DL之狀態下,將基板P送往搬送方向下游側之2組驅動輥R5、R6。2組驅動輥R5、R6在基板P之搬送方向隔著既定間隔配置。驅動輥R5夾持搬送之基板P之上游側旋轉、驅動輥R6夾持搬送之基板P之下游側旋轉,據以將基板P供應向處理裝置U4。此時,由於基板P被賦予有鬆弛DL,因此能吸收在較驅動輥R6位於搬送方向下游側所產生之搬送速度之變動,能切斷搬送速度之變動對基板P之曝光處理之影響。此外,於處理裝置U3內設有為進行光罩M之光罩圖案之一部分之像與基板P之相對位置對準(alignment)而檢測預先形成在基板P之對準標記等之對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2。 The processing device (substrate processing device) U3 is an exposure device that projects a pattern such as a circuit or a wiring for a substrate (photosensitive substrate) P supplied from the processing device U2 with a photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface. The details will be described later. The processing unit U3 illuminates the penetrating mask M with an illumination beam, and projects and exposes the projection beam obtained by reflecting the illumination beam by the mask M on a part wound around a rotating tube (support tube) 25. Substrate P on the outer peripheral surface. The processing device U3 includes a driving roller R4 that transports the substrate P supplied from the processing device U2 to the downstream side in the conveying direction, and an edge position controller EPC3 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The driving roller R4 rotates while holding both the front and back surfaces of the substrate P to feed the substrate P to the downstream side in the conveying direction, thereby supplying the substrate P to the exposure position. The edge position controller EPC3 has the same configuration as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position of the substrate P in the width direction so that the width direction of the substrate P at the exposure position becomes the target position. In addition, the processing device U3 includes two sets of driving rollers R5 and R6 that transport the substrate P to the downstream side in the conveying direction in a state where the slack DL is given to the substrate P after exposure. The two sets of driving rollers R5 and R6 are in the conveying direction of the substrate P. Arranged at predetermined intervals. The driving roller R5 rotates on the upstream side of the substrate P being conveyed, and the driving roller R6 rotates on the downstream side of the substrate P being conveyed, thereby supplying the substrate P to the processing device U4. At this time, since the substrate P is provided with the slack DL, it is possible to absorb the variation in the conveying speed which is located downstream of the driving roller R6 in the conveying direction, and it is possible to cut off the influence of the variation in the conveying speed on the exposure processing of the substrate P. In addition, an alignment microscope AM1 is provided in the processing device U3 to perform alignment of the image of a part of the mask pattern of the mask M and the relative position of the substrate P and detect an alignment mark or the like formed on the substrate P in advance. , AM2.

處理裝置U4,係對從處理裝置U3搬送而來之曝光後之基板P ,進行濕式之顯影處理、無電電鍍處理等之濕式處理裝置。處理裝置U4,於其內部具有於鉛直方向(Z方向)階段化之3個處理槽BT1、BT2、BT3、與搬送基板P之複數個輥。複數個輥係以基板P依序通過3個處理槽BT1、BT2、BT3內部之搬送路徑的方式配置。於處理槽BT3之搬送方向下游側設有驅動輥R7,驅動輥R7藉由一邊夾持通過處理槽BT3後之基板P一邊旋轉,據以將基板P供應向處理裝置U5。 The processing device U4 is the exposed substrate P after being transported from the processing device U3. Wet processing equipment that performs wet development processing and electroless plating processing. The processing device U4 includes three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3 and a plurality of rollers for transporting the substrate P in the vertical direction (Z direction). The plurality of rollers are arranged such that the substrate P sequentially passes through the conveying paths inside the three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3. A driving roller R7 is provided downstream of the processing tank BT3 in the conveying direction. The driving roller R7 rotates while holding the substrate P passing through the processing tank BT3 to supply the substrate P to the processing apparatus U5.

雖省略圖示,但處理裝置U5係使從處理裝置U4搬送而來之基板P乾燥的乾燥裝置。處理裝置U5,將在處理裝置U4經濕式處理而附著於基板P之水分含有量,調整為既定水分含有量。由處理裝置U5加以乾燥之基板P,經由若干個處理裝置後被搬送至處理裝置Un。在以處理裝置Un加以處理後,基板P即被捲繞於基板回收裝置4之回收用捲筒FR2。 Although not shown, the processing device U5 is a drying device for drying the substrate P transferred from the processing device U4. The processing device U5 adjusts the moisture content of the processing device U4 to be adhered to the substrate P by wet processing, and adjusts the moisture content to a predetermined moisture content. The substrate P dried by the processing device U5 is transported to the processing device Un after passing through several processing devices. After being processed by the processing apparatus Un, the substrate P is wound on the reel FR2 for recycling of the substrate recovery apparatus 4.

上位控制裝置5,統籌控制基板供應裝置2、基板回收裝置4及複數個處理裝置U1~Un。上位控制裝置5控制基板供應裝置2及基板回收裝置4,將基板P從基板供應裝置2搬送向基板回收裝置4。又,上位控制裝置5,與基板P之搬送同步,控制複數個處理裝置U1~Un,以實施對基板P之各種處理。此上位控制裝置5包含電腦、與儲存有程式之記憶媒體,藉由該電腦實施儲存在記憶媒體中之程式,而發揮本第1實施形態之上位控制裝置5之功能。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the substrate supply device 2, the substrate recovery device 4, and a plurality of processing devices U1 to Un. The higher-level control device 5 controls the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4, and transfers the substrate P from the substrate supply device 2 to the substrate recovery device 4. In addition, the higher-level control device 5 controls a plurality of processing devices U1 to Un in synchronization with the conveyance of the substrate P to perform various processes on the substrate P. This higher-level control device 5 includes a computer and a storage medium storing a program, and the computer executes the program stored in the storage medium to perform the function of the higher-level control device 5 of the first embodiment.

又,於第1實施形態之元件製造系統1,雖係例示從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P依序經由n台處理裝置U1~Un後,被捲繞於回收用捲筒FR2之例,但不限於此構成。例如,元件製造系統1可以是從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P,經由1台處理裝置後即被捲繞於回收用捲筒FR2之構成。此時 ,欲對基板P進行不同處理時,係使用基板供應裝置2及基板回收裝置4,再次將基板P供應至不同處理裝置。 Moreover, in the component manufacturing system 1 of the first embodiment, the substrate P sent from the supply roll FR1 is sequentially exemplified by being passed around the n processing units U1 to Un and then wound around the recovery roll FR2. But it is not limited to this constitution. For example, the component manufacturing system 1 may have a structure in which the substrate P delivered from the supply roll FR1 is wound around the recovery roll FR2 after passing through a processing device. at this time When different processing is performed on the substrate P, the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4 are used to supply the substrate P to different processing devices again.

<簡化之元件製造系統> <Simplified component manufacturing system>

接著,為易於掌握本發明之特徴部分,針對將圖1之元件製造系統1予以簡化後之元件製造系統1,一邊參照圖2一邊加以說明。圖2係顯示將第1實施形態之元件製造系統1予以簡化時之構成的圖。如圖2所示,簡化後之元件製造系統1,具有基板供應裝置2、作為曝光裝置之處理裝置U3(以下,稱曝光裝置)、基板回收裝置4、以及上位控制裝置5。又,圖2係X方向、Y方向及Z方向正交之正交座標系,為與圖1相同之正交座標系。又,於簡化後之元件製造系統1中,基板供應裝置2係省略了邊緣位置控制器EPC1之構成。此係由於曝光裝置U3中,已設有邊緣位置控制器EPC3之故。首先,參照圖2說明基板供應裝置2。 Next, in order to make it easy to grasp the special part of the present invention, the component manufacturing system 1 in which the component manufacturing system 1 in FIG. 1 is simplified will be described with reference to FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a simplified configuration of the component manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the simplified component manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2, a processing device U3 (hereinafter referred to as an exposure device) as an exposure device, a substrate recovery device 4, and a higher-level control device 5. 2 is an orthogonal coordinate system orthogonal to the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction, and is the same orthogonal coordinate system as that of FIG. 1. In the simplified component manufacturing system 1, the substrate supply device 2 has a configuration in which the edge position controller EPC1 is omitted. This is because the edge position controller EPC3 is already provided in the exposure device U3. First, the substrate supply device 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

<基板供應裝置> <Substrate supply device>

基板供應裝置2,具有安裝供應用捲筒FR1之第1軸承部111、與使第1軸承部111升降之第1升降機構112。此外,基板供應裝置2具有進入角度檢測部114,進入角度檢測部114連接於上位控制裝置5。此處,第1實施形態中,上位控制裝置5之功能在於作為基板供應裝置2之控制裝置(控制部)。又,作為基板供應裝置2之控制裝置,亦可設置控制基板供應裝置2之下位控制裝置,由下位控制裝置控制基板供應裝置2。 The substrate supply device 2 includes a first bearing portion 111 on which the supply roll FR1 is mounted, and a first lifting mechanism 112 that raises and lowers the first bearing portion 111. The substrate supply device 2 includes an entry angle detection unit 114, and the entry angle detection unit 114 is connected to the host controller 5. Here, in the first embodiment, the higher-level control device 5 functions as a control device (control unit) as the substrate supply device 2. In addition, as a control device of the substrate supply device 2, a lower-level control device that controls the substrate supply device 2 may be provided, and the lower-level control device controls the substrate supply device 2.

第1軸承部111將供應用捲筒FR1軸支成可旋轉。被第1軸承部111軸支之供應用捲筒FR1,當將基板P朝向曝光裝置U3供應(送出)時,供應用捲筒FR1之巻徑會隨著基板P送出之分而減小。因此,從供應用捲筒FR1 送出基板P之位置,會隨著基板P被送出之送出量而變化。 The first bearing portion 111 rotatably supports the supply reel FR1. When the supply roll FR1 supported by the first bearing portion 111 is supported (sent out) toward the exposure device U3, the diameter of the supply roll FR1 decreases as the substrate P is sent out. Therefore, from supply roll FR1 The position at which the substrate P is sent out varies depending on the amount by which the substrate P is sent out.

第1升降機構112設置在設置面E與第1軸承部111之間。第1升降機構112使第1軸承部111與供應用捲筒FR1一起往Z方向(鉛直方向)移動。第1升降機構112連接於上位控制裝置5,上位控制裝置5以第1升降機構112使第1軸承部111往Z方向移動,即能使從供應用捲筒FR1送出基板P之位置位於既定位置。 The first lifting mechanism 112 is provided between the installation surface E and the first bearing portion 111. The first lifting mechanism 112 moves the first bearing portion 111 together with the supply roll FR1 in the Z direction (vertical direction). The first lifting mechanism 112 is connected to the higher-level control device 5. The higher-level control device 5 moves the first bearing portion 111 in the Z direction by the first lifting mechanism 112, that is, the position where the substrate P is fed out from the supply roll FR1 is at a predetermined position .

進入角度檢測部114,係檢測基板P進入後述曝光裝置U3之搬送輥127之進入角度θ 1。進入角度檢測部114設置在搬送輥127周圍。此處,進入角度θ 1,於XZ面內,係延伸於通過搬送輥127中心軸之鉛直方向的直線(Z軸平行)與搬送輥127之上游側之基板P所形成的角度。進入角度檢測部114將檢測結果輸出至其所連接之上位控制裝置5。 The entry angle detection unit 114 detects the entry angle θ 1 of the substrate P entering the conveyance roller 127 of the exposure device U3 described later. The entry angle detection unit 114 is provided around the conveyance roller 127. Here, the entering angle θ 1 is a straight line (Z axis) extending in the vertical direction passing the central axis of the conveying roller 127 in the XZ plane. (Parallel) and the angle formed by the substrate P on the upstream side of the transfer roller 127. The entry angle detection unit 114 outputs a detection result to the connected higher-level control device 5.

上位控制裝置5,根據進入角度檢測部114之檢測結果控制第1升降機構112。具體而言,上位控制裝置5控制第1升降機構112,以使進入角度θ 1成為預先規定之目標進入角度。也就是說,從供應用捲筒FR1送出之基板P之送出量越多、供應用捲筒FR1之巻徑越小,相對於目標進入角度之進入角度θ 1即越大。因此,上位控制裝置5藉由使第1升降機構112移動至Z方向之下方側(下降),據以縮小進入角度θ 1,將進入角度θ 1修正成目標進入角度。以此方式,上位控制裝置5根據進入角度檢測部114之檢測結果,對第1升降機構112進行回饋控制,以使進入角度θ 1成為目標進入角度。從而,由於基板供應裝置2相對搬送輥127能恆以目標進入角度供應基板P,因此能降低因進入角度θ 1之變化對基板P造成之影響。又,作為回饋控制,可以是P(比例)控制、PI(比例積分)控制、PID(比例積分微分)控制 等之任一種控制。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the first lifting mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the entering angle detection unit 114. Specifically, the higher-level control device 5 controls the first lifting mechanism 112 so that the entry angle θ 1 becomes a predetermined target entry angle. That is, the larger the amount of the substrate P sent from the supply roll FR1 and the smaller the diameter of the supply roll FR1, the larger the entry angle θ1 with respect to the target entry angle. Therefore, the higher-level control device 5 moves the first elevating mechanism 112 to the lower side (downward) in the Z direction, thereby reducing the entering angle θ 1 and correcting the entering angle θ 1 to the target entering angle. In this way, the higher-level control device 5 performs feedback control on the first lifting mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the entry angle detection unit 114 so that the entry angle θ 1 becomes the target entry angle. Therefore, since the substrate supply device 2 can constantly supply the substrate P at the target entry angle with respect to the conveying roller 127, the influence of the change in the entry angle θ 1 on the substrate P can be reduced. The feedback control may be P (proportional) control, PI (proportional integral) control, or PID (proportional integral derivative) control. Either control.

<曝光裝置(基板處理裝置)> <Exposure device (substrate processing device)>

接著,針對圖2所示之曝光裝置U3,亦參照圖3加以說明。曝光裝置U3,包含位置調整單元120、曝光單元121、驅動單元122(參照圖3)、按壓機構130、以及除振台(防振裝置)131。除振台131設在設置面E上,用以降低來自設置面E之振動(所謂的地面振動)傳至曝光單元121本體。位置調整單元120設在設置面E上,包含圖1所示之上述邊緣位置控制器EPC3而構成。位置調整單元120,於X方向與基板供應裝置2相鄰設置。曝光單元121設在除振台131上,於X方向夾著位置調整單元120設置在基板供應裝置2之相反側。驅動單元122(參照圖3)設在設置面E上,於Y方向與曝光單元121鄰設置。也就是說,位置調整單元120、曝光單元121及驅動單元122於設置面E上係設在相異位置。又,曝光單元121與位置調整單元120及驅動單元122(參照圖3),於機械上為非結合狀態(非接觸的獨立狀態)。 Next, the exposure apparatus U3 shown in FIG. 2 will also be described with reference to FIG. 3. The exposure device U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120, an exposure unit 121, a driving unit 122 (see FIG. 3), a pressing mechanism 130, and a vibration isolator (vibration isolator) 131. The vibration isolator 131 is provided on the installation surface E to reduce the vibration (so-called ground vibration) from the installation surface E to the body of the exposure unit 121. The position adjustment unit 120 is provided on the installation surface E and includes the edge position controller EPC3 shown in FIG. 1. The position adjustment unit 120 is disposed adjacent to the substrate supply device 2 in the X direction. The exposure unit 121 is provided on the vibration isolation table 131, and the position adjustment unit 120 is disposed on the opposite side of the substrate supply device 2 in the X direction. The driving unit 122 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the installation surface E, and is disposed adjacent to the exposure unit 121 in the Y direction. That is, the position adjusting unit 120, the exposure unit 121, and the driving unit 122 are disposed at different positions on the installation surface E. In addition, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the driving unit 122 (see FIG. 3) are mechanically in a non-coupled state (a non-contact independent state).

如上所述,位置調整單元120及驅動單元122係設在設置面E上,另一方面,曝光單元121則係透過除振台131設在設置面E上。因此,曝光單元121與位置調整單元120及驅動單元122,係不同的振動模式。換言之,曝光單元121係設置成與位置調整單元120及驅動單元122在振動傳遞上隔絕的狀態(振動不易彼此傳遞的狀態、亦即振動被有效隔絕的狀態)。 As described above, the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 are provided on the installation surface E. On the other hand, the exposure unit 121 is provided on the installation surface E through the vibration isolation table 131. Therefore, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the driving unit 122 have different vibration modes. In other words, the exposure unit 121 is provided in a state that is isolated from the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 in terms of vibration transmission (a state in which vibration is not easily transmitted to each other, that is, a state in which vibration is effectively isolated).

又,曝光裝置U3,具有檢測基板P之位置的第1基板檢測部123及第2基板檢測部124。第1基板檢測部123及第2基板檢測部124連接於上位控制裝置5。又,曝光裝置U3中,與基板供應裝置2同樣的,上位控制裝置5之功能亦是作為曝光裝置U3之控制裝置(控制部)。當然,作為曝光裝 置U3之控制裝置,亦可設置控制曝光裝置U3之下位控制裝置,做成以下位控制裝置控制曝光裝置U3之構成。 The exposure device U3 includes a first substrate detection unit 123 and a second substrate detection unit 124 that detect the position of the substrate P. The first substrate detection unit 123 and the second substrate detection unit 124 are connected to the host controller 5. In addition, in the exposure device U3, similarly to the substrate supply device 2, the function of the higher-level control device 5 is also a control device (control unit) of the exposure device U3. Of course, as exposure equipment When the control device of U3 is set, a lower-level control device for controlling the exposure device U3 can also be provided, and the lower-level control device can be configured to control the exposure device U3.

<位置調整單元> <Position adjustment unit>

如圖2所示,位置調整單元120,具有基台125、上述邊緣位置控制器EPC3(寬度移動機構)、以及固定輥126。基台125設在設置面E上,支承邊緣位置控制器EPC3及固定輥126。基台125亦可以是具有除振功能之除振台。於此基台125,設有於Y方向或繞Z軸之旋轉方向調整基台125之位置的基台位置調整機構128。基台位置調整機構128連接於上位控制裝置5,上位控制裝置5藉由控制基台位置調整機構128,可一併調整設置在基台125上之邊緣位置控制器EPC3及固定輥126之位置。也就是說,基台位置調整機構128之功能,係作為相對曝光單元121於Y方向調整固定輥126之位置的輥位置調整機構。 As shown in FIG. 2, the position adjustment unit 120 includes a base 125, the aforementioned edge position controller EPC3 (width moving mechanism), and a fixed roller 126. The base 125 is provided on the installation surface E, and supports the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The base 125 may also be a vibration isolation platform having a vibration isolation function. A base position adjustment mechanism 128 is provided on the base 125 to adjust the position of the base 125 in the Y direction or the rotation direction around the Z axis. The abutment position adjustment mechanism 128 is connected to the upper control device 5. The upper control device 5 can adjust the positions of the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126 provided on the abutment 125 by controlling the abutment position adjustment mechanism 128. That is, the function of the abutment position adjustment mechanism 128 is a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction relative to the exposure unit 121.

邊緣位置控制器EPC3,能在基台125上移動於基板P之寬度方向(Y方向)。邊緣位置控制器EPC3,具有包含設在搬送基板P之搬送方向最上游側之搬送輥127的複數個輥。搬送輥127,將從基板供應裝置2供應之基板P引導至位置調整單元120之內部。邊緣位置控制器EPC3連接於上位控制裝置5,根據第1基板檢測部123之檢測結果被上位控制裝置5控制。 The edge position controller EPC3 can move on the base 125 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3 includes a plurality of rollers including a transfer roller 127 provided on the most upstream side in the transfer direction of the transfer substrate P. The transfer roller 127 guides the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2 into the position adjustment unit 120. The edge position controller EPC3 is connected to the higher-level control device 5, and is controlled by the higher-level control device 5 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123.

固定輥126,將以邊緣位置控制器EPC3於寬度方向經位置調整之基板P引導向曝光單元121。固定輥126可旋轉,相對基台125之位置被固定。因此,藉由以邊緣位置控制器EPC3使基板P往寬度方向移動,即能調整進入固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置。 The fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P whose position is adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3 to the exposure unit 121. The fixed roller 126 is rotatable, and the position relative to the base 125 is fixed. Therefore, by moving the substrate P in the width direction with the edge position controller EPC3, the position of the substrate P entering the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be adjusted.

第1基板檢測部123,檢測從邊緣位置控制器EPC3搬送至固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置。第1基板檢測部123固定在基台125上。 因此,第1基板檢測部123與邊緣位置控制器EPC3及固定輥126係相同的振動模式。第1基板檢測部123,檢測與固定輥126接觸之基板P端部之邊緣位置。第1基板檢測部123將檢測結果輸出至所連接之上位控制裝置5。 The first substrate detection unit 123 detects a position in the width direction of the substrate P transferred from the edge position controller EPC3 to the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 is fixed to the base 125. Therefore, the first substrate detection unit 123 has the same vibration mode as the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 detects an edge position of an end portion of the substrate P that is in contact with the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 outputs a detection result to the connected higher-level control device 5.

第2基板檢測部124,檢測從位置調整單元120供應至曝光單元121之基板P之位置。第2基板檢測部124被固定於設置曝光單元121之除振台131上。因此,第2基板檢測部124與曝光單元121為相同振動模式。第2基板檢測部124設在曝光單元121之導入基板P的導入側。具體而言,第2基板檢測部124係在設於曝光單元121之搬送方向最上游側之引導輥28之上游側的位置,與引導輥28相鄰設置。第2基板檢測部124,檢測供應至曝光單元121之基板P於寬度方向(Y方向)及鉛直方向(Z方向)之位置。第2基板檢測部124將檢測結果輸出至所連接之上位控制裝置5。 The second substrate detection unit 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 is fixed to a vibration isolation table 131 on which the exposure unit 121 is provided. Therefore, the second substrate detection unit 124 and the exposure unit 121 have the same vibration mode. The second substrate detection unit 124 is provided on the introduction side of the introduction substrate P of the exposure unit 121. Specifically, the second substrate detection unit 124 is provided adjacent to the guide roller 28 at a position upstream of the guide roller 28 provided on the most upstream side in the conveying direction of the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 detects the positions of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 in the width direction (Y direction) and the vertical direction (Z direction). The second substrate detection unit 124 outputs a detection result to the connected higher-level control device 5.

上位控制裝置5,根據第1基板檢測部123之檢測結果控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3。具體而言,上位控制裝置5,算出從以第1基板檢測部123檢測之進入固定輥126之基板P兩端部之邊緣(Y方向兩邊緣)之位置求出之Y方向中心位置、與預先規定之第1目標位置(目標中心位置)的差。接著,上位控制裝置5以使該差為0之方式對邊緣位置控制器EPC3進行回饋控制,使基板P往寬度方向移動,將相對固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之中心位置修正至第1目標中心位置。由於邊緣位置控制器EPC3可將相對固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置維持於第1目標位置,因此能降低相對固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置偏移。又,在此場合,回饋控制可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等之任一種控制。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC3 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123. Specifically, the host controller 5 calculates the center position in the Y direction from the positions of the edges (both edges in the Y direction) of the two ends of the substrate P entering the fixed roller 126 detected by the first substrate detection unit 123, and The difference between the predetermined first target position (target center position). Next, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the edge position controller EPC3 so that the difference is 0, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and corrects the center position of the substrate P relative to the fixed roller 126 in the width direction to the first position. Target center position. Since the edge position controller EPC3 can maintain the position of the substrate P relative to the fixed roller 126 in the width direction at the first target position, the position deviation of the substrate P relative to the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be reduced. In this case, the feedback control may be any of P control, PI control, and PID control.

又,上位控制裝置5,根據第2基板檢測部124之檢測結果控 制基台位置調整機構128。具體而言,上位控制裝置5,算出從以第2基板檢測部124檢測之基板P之寬度方向兩端之位置求出之中心位置、與預先規定之第2目標中心位置的差。接著,上位控制裝置5,以該差為0之方式對基台位置調整機構128進行回饋控制,以基台位置調整機構128調整基台125之位置,據以調整相對引導輥28之固定輥126於Y方向之位置。此時,上位控制裝置5調整固定輥126之位置,以避免基板P產生扭轉及寬度方向之位置偏移。例如,上位控制裝置5以固定輥126之軸方向相對引導輥28之軸方向成平行之方式調整其位置。上位控制裝置5,由於能以基台位置調整機構128於Y方向或繞Z軸之旋轉方向調整固定輥126之位置,而能將供應至曝光單元121之基板P之寬度方向中心位置維持於第2目標中心位置,因此能降低基板P之扭轉及寬度方向之位置偏移。此外,此場合,作為回饋控制亦可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等之任一種控制。 In addition, the high-level control device 5 controls based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Manufacturing abutment position adjustment mechanism 128. Specifically, the higher-level control device 5 calculates a difference between the center position obtained from the positions in the widthwise both ends of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124 and a predetermined second target center position. Next, the higher-level control device 5 performs feedback control on the abutment position adjustment mechanism 128 so that the difference is 0, adjusts the position of the abutment 125 with the abutment position adjustment mechanism 128, and adjusts the fixed roller 126 relative to the guide roller 28 accordingly. Position in the Y direction. At this time, the upper-level control device 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 to avoid the substrate P from being twisted and being displaced in the width direction. For example, the upper control device 5 adjusts its position so that the axial direction of the fixed roller 126 is parallel to the axial direction of the guide roller 28. The upper control device 5 can adjust the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction or the rotation direction around the Z axis by the abutment position adjustment mechanism 128, so that the center position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 can be maintained at the first position. (2) The target center position can reduce the twist of the substrate P and the positional deviation in the width direction. In this case, the feedback control may be any of P control, PI control, and PID control.

如以上所述,位置調整單元120可將供應至固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置修正至第1目標位置,將供應至曝光單元121之引導輥28之基板P之位置修正至第2目標位置。 As described above, the position adjustment unit 120 can correct the position of the substrate P supplied to the fixed roller 126 in the width direction to the first target position, and correct the position of the substrate P supplied to the guide roller 28 of the exposure unit 121 to the second target position. target location.

又,第1實施形態中,雖係修正從位置調整單元120供應至曝光單元121之基板P之位置,但不限於此構成,例如,亦可以是修正從基板供應裝置2供應至位置調整單元120之基板P之位置。此場合,係於搬送輥127於搬送方向之上游側設置基板檢測部,並設置調整供應用捲筒FR1之位置的捲筒位置調整機構。亦可藉由上位控制裝置5根據基板檢測部之檢測結果控制捲筒位置調整機構,以調整供應用捲筒FR1。同樣的,亦可修正從曝光單元121供應至基板回收裝置4之基板P之位置。 In the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 is corrected, but is not limited to this configuration. For example, the position supplied from the substrate supply device 2 to the position adjustment unit 120 may be corrected. The position of the substrate P. In this case, a substrate detection unit is provided on the upstream side of the conveyance roller 127 in the conveyance direction, and a roll position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the supply roll FR1 is provided. The reel position adjusting mechanism can also be controlled by the host control device 5 based on the detection result of the substrate detection section to adjust the supply reel FR1. Similarly, the position of the substrate P supplied from the exposure unit 121 to the substrate recovery device 4 may be corrected.

<曝光單元> <Exposure unit>

其次,針對第1實施形態之曝光裝置U3之曝光單元121之構成,參照圖2至圖7加以說明。圖3係顯示第1實施形態之曝光裝置(基板處理裝置)U3之部分構成的圖,圖4係顯示圖3中之基板支承機構12之驅動部之構成的圖。圖5係顯示第1實施形態之曝光單元121之整體構成的圖。圖6係顯示圖5所示之曝光單元121之照明區域IR及投影區域PA之配置的圖。圖7係圖5所示之曝光單元121之投影光學系PL之構成的圖。 Next, the configuration of the exposure unit 121 of the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 7. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration of a driving section of the substrate support mechanism 12 in FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the illumination area IR and the projection area PA of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration of a projection optical system PL of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. 5.

圖2至圖5所示之曝光單元121係所謂的掃描曝光裝置,藉由構成基板支承機構(基板搬送機構)12之複數個引導輥28與可旋轉之圓筒狀旋轉筒25,一邊往搬送方向(掃描方向)搬送基板P、一邊將形成在平面狀光罩M之光罩圖案之像投影曝光於基板P之表面。又,圖3及圖4係從-X側觀察曝光單元121的圖,圖5及圖7為X方向、Y方向及Z方向正交之正交座標系,與圖1為同樣的正交座標系。 The exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 5 is a so-called scanning exposure device, and is conveyed by a plurality of guide rollers 28 and a rotatable cylindrical rotating cylinder 25 constituting a substrate support mechanism (substrate transfer mechanism) 12. The substrate P is transported in the direction (scanning direction), and the image of the mask pattern formed on the planar mask M is projected and exposed on the surface of the substrate P while scanning. 3 and 4 are views of the exposure unit 121 viewed from the -X side, and Figs. 5 and 7 are orthogonal coordinate systems orthogonal to the X direction, Y direction, and Z direction, and are the same orthogonal coordinates as Fig. 1. system.

首先,說明用於曝光單元121之光罩M。光罩M,係被作成例如於平坦性佳之玻璃板之一面以鉻等遮光層形成有光罩圖案之穿透型的平面狀片型光罩。在被保持於後述光罩載台21上之狀態下使用。光罩M具有未形成光罩圖案之圖案非形成區域,於圖案非形成區域被安裝在光罩載台21上。光罩M可相對光罩載台21釋放。 First, the mask M used for the exposure unit 121 will be described. The photomask M is a transparent sheet-shaped photomask in which a photomask pattern is formed with a light-shielding layer such as chromium on one surface of a flat glass plate. It is used while being held on a mask stage 21 described later. The photomask M has a pattern non-formation area in which a photomask pattern is not formed, and is mounted on the photomask stage 21 in the pattern non-formation area. The photomask M can be released relative to the photomask stage 21.

又,光罩M可以是形成有對應1個顯示元件之面板用圖案的整體或一部分,亦可以是形成有對應複數個顯示元件之面板用圖案的取多面者。又,於光罩M,可以是面板用圖案於光罩M之掃描方向(X方向)反覆形成有複數個,亦可以是小型的面板用圖案在與掃描方向正交之方向(Y 方向)反覆形成有複數個。再者,光罩M,可以是形成有第1顯示元件之面板用圖案、與尺寸等和第1顯示元件不同之第2顯示元件之面板用圖案。 The photomask M may be the whole or a part of a panel pattern corresponding to one display element, or may be a multi-faceted one having a panel pattern corresponding to a plurality of display elements. In the mask M, a plurality of patterns for the panel may be repeatedly formed in the scanning direction (X direction) of the mask M, or a small pattern for the panel may be formed in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (Y Direction) is repeatedly formed. In addition, the mask M may be a pattern for a panel on which a first display element is formed, and a pattern for a panel on a second display element that is different in size from the first display element.

如圖3、圖5所示,設置在除振台131上之曝光單元121除上述對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2之外,亦具有裝置框架132、支承光罩載台21之光罩保持機構11、基板支承機構12、投影光學系PL、以及下位控制裝置(控制部)16。此曝光單元121,承受來自照明機構13之照明光束EL1之照射,將從被保持在光罩保持機構11之光罩M之光罩圖案產生之穿透光(成像光束)投射於被支承在基板支承機構12之旋轉筒25的基板P,將光罩圖案之部分投影像成像在基板P表面。 As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, in addition to the above-mentioned alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, the exposure unit 121 provided on the vibration isolation table 131 also includes a device frame 132, a mask holding mechanism 11 that supports a mask stage 21, The substrate supporting mechanism 12, the projection optical system PL, and a lower-level control device (control unit) 16. This exposure unit 121 is irradiated with the illumination light beam EL1 from the illumination mechanism 13 and projects the penetrating light (imaging beam) generated from the mask pattern of the mask M held by the mask holding mechanism 11 on the substrate supported on the substrate The substrate P of the rotating cylinder 25 of the support mechanism 12 projects a part of the mask pattern on the surface of the substrate P to form an image.

下位控制裝置16控制曝光裝置U3之各部,使各部實施處理。下位控制裝置16可以是元件製造系統1之上位控制裝置5之一部分或全部。又,下位控制裝置16亦可以是受上位控制裝置5控制、與上位控制裝置5不同之其他裝置。下位控制裝置16,例如包含電腦。 The lower-level control device 16 controls each part of the exposure device U3 and causes each part to perform processing. The lower-level control device 16 may be a part or all of the upper-level control device 5 of the component manufacturing system 1. The lower control device 16 may be another device controlled by the upper control device 5 and different from the upper control device 5. The lower control device 16 includes, for example, a computer.

除振台131設在設置面E上,支承裝置框架132。具體而言,如圖3所示,除振台131,包含於Y方向設在外側之第1除振台131a、與設在第1除振台131a內側之第2除振台131b。 The vibration isolation table 131 is provided on the installation surface E, and supports the device frame 132. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the vibration isolation table 131 includes a first vibration isolation table 131 a provided outside in the Y direction, and a second vibration isolation table 131 b provided inside the first vibration isolation table 131 a.

裝置框架132設在第1除振台131a及第2除振台131b上,支承光罩保持機構11、基板支承機構12、照明機構13及投影光學系PL。裝置框架132,具有支承光罩保持機構11、照明機構13及投影光學系PL之第1框架132a、與支承基板支承機構12之第2框架132b。第1框架132a及第2框架132b分別獨立設置,以第1框架132a覆蓋第2框架132b之方式配置。第1框架132a設在第1除振台131a上,第2框架132b則設在第2除振台131b上。 The device frame 132 is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a and the second vibration isolation table 131b, and supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL. The device frame 132 includes a first frame 132 a that supports the mask holding mechanism 11, an illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL, and a second frame 132 b that supports the substrate support mechanism 12. The first frame 132a and the second frame 132b are separately provided, and are arranged so that the first frame 132a covers the second frame 132b. The first frame 132a is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a, and the second frame 132b is provided on the second vibration isolation table 131b.

第1框架132a,係由設在第1除振台131a上之第1下方框架135、設在第1下方框架135之Z方向上方之第1上方框架136、以及立設於第1上方框架136之臂部137構成。第1下方框架135具有立設在第1除振台131a上之脚部135a與被脚部135a支承之上面部135b,於上面部135b透過保持構件143支承投影光學系PL。保持構件143,從XY面內觀察時,係以配置在上面部135b上3處之金屬球等構成之墊圈構件145,動態的支承。脚部135a係配置成於其既定部位,後述旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2於Y方向插通。 The first frame 132a includes a first lower frame 135 provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a, a first upper frame 136 provided above the Z direction of the first lower frame 135, and a first upper frame 136. The arm portion 137 is configured. The first lower frame 135 includes a leg portion 135 a standing on the first vibration isolation table 131 a and an upper surface portion 135 b supported by the leg portion 135 a. The upper surface portion 135 b supports the projection optical system PL through the holding member 143. The holding member 143 is dynamically supported by a washer member 145 composed of metal balls and the like disposed at three positions on the upper surface portion 135b when viewed from the XY plane. The leg part 135a is arrange | positioned at the predetermined position, and the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating cylinder 25 mentioned later is inserted in the Y direction.

第1上方框架136,與第1下方框架135同樣的具有立設在上面部135b上之脚部136a、與被脚部136a支承之上面部136b,於上面部136b支承光罩保持機構11(光罩載台21)。臂部137立設在上面部136b上,以照明機構13位於光罩保持機構11上方之方式支承照明機構13。 The first upper frame 136, similar to the first lower frame 135, has a leg portion 136a standing on the upper surface portion 135b, and an upper surface portion 136b supported by the leg portion 136a. The upper surface portion 136b supports the mask holding mechanism 11 (light Cover stage 21). The arm portion 137 is erected on the upper surface portion 136 b and supports the lighting mechanism 13 so that the lighting mechanism 13 is positioned above the mask holding mechanism 11.

第2框架132b,係由設在第2除振台131b上之下面部139、與在下面部139上於Y方向分離立設之一對軸承部140構成。於一對軸承部140設有軸支作為旋轉筒25之旋轉中心之旋轉軸AX2的空氣軸承141。 The second frame 132b is composed of a pair of bearing portions 140 provided on the upper and lower surface portions 139 of the second vibration isolation table 131b and separated from the lower surface portion 139 in the Y direction. An air bearing 141 is provided on the pair of bearing portions 140 so as to support a rotation axis AX2 as a rotation center of the rotation cylinder 25.

光罩保持機構11,具有保持光罩M之光罩載台(光罩保持構件)21、用以使光罩載台21移動之未圖示的移動機構(線性導件、空氣軸承等)、與用以將動力傳遞至移動機構之傳遞構件23。光罩載台21係構成為圍繞光罩M之圖案形成區域的框狀,藉由設在驅動單元122之光罩側驅動部(馬達等之驅動源)22於第1上方框架136之上面部136b,移動於作為掃描方向之X方向。從傳遞構件23傳遞之驅動力,提供於以移動機構進行之光罩載台21之直線驅動。 The mask holding mechanism 11 includes a mask stage (mask holding member) 21 that holds the mask M, a not-shown moving mechanism (linear guide, air bearing, etc.) for moving the mask stage 21, And a transmission member 23 for transmitting power to the moving mechanism. The photomask stage 21 is formed in a frame shape surrounding the pattern forming area of the photomask M, and is provided on the top surface of the first upper frame 136 by a photomask-side driving section (a driving source such as a motor) provided in the driving unit 122. 136b, moving in the X direction which is the scanning direction. The driving force transmitted from the transmission member 23 is provided to linearly drive the photomask stage 21 by a moving mechanism.

本實施形態中,由於光罩載台21為進行掃描曝光而於X方向 直線運動,因此光罩側驅動部(驅動源)22包含於X方向延設之方式固定在支柱框架146之線性馬達的磁石軌道(固定子),傳遞構件23包含與該磁石軌道以一定間距對向之線性馬達的線圈單元(可動子)。此外,圖3中,在將投影光學系PL支承於裝置框架132側之保持構件143,設有測量旋轉筒25之外周面(或基板P表面)中、對應投影光學系PL之曝光位置之表面高度變化的變位感測器SG1與從光罩載台21之下側測量光罩M之Z方向位置變化的變位感測器SG2。 In this embodiment, the mask stage 21 is positioned in the X direction for scanning exposure. The linear movement, therefore, the mask-side driving unit (driving source) 22 includes a magnet track (fixer) of a linear motor fixed to the pillar frame 146 in the X direction, and the transmission member 23 includes a pair of magnet tracks at a certain distance from the magnet track. The coil unit (movable element) of the linear motor. In addition, in FIG. 3, the holding member 143 that supports the projection optical system PL on the side of the device frame 132 is provided with a surface corresponding to the exposure position of the projection optical system PL among the outer peripheral surface (or the surface of the substrate P) of the rotating cylinder 25. The displacement sensor SG1 having a height change and the displacement sensor SG2 which measures a position change in the Z direction of the photomask M from the lower side of the photomask stage 21.

另一方面,如圖2、圖3所示,將基板P圍繞略半周加以支承之旋轉筒25,係以設在圖3所示之驅動單元122之基板側驅動部(旋轉馬達等之驅動源)26旋轉。如圖5中亦有所示,旋轉筒25係形成圓筒形狀,此圓筒形狀具有以延伸於Y方向之旋轉軸AX2為中心之曲率半徑為Rfa的外周面(圓周面)。此處,以包含旋轉軸AX2之中心線、與YZ面平行之面為中心面CL(參照圖5)。旋轉筒25之一部分圓周面,為以既定張力支承基板P之支承面P2。也就是說,旋轉筒25係將基板P以一定張力捲繞於該支承面P2,據以將基板P支承為安定的圓筒曲面狀。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the rotary cylinder 25 supporting the substrate P around a half-circle is provided on a substrate-side driving section (a driving source of a rotary motor or the like) provided in the driving unit 122 shown in FIG. 3. ) 26 Spin. As also shown in FIG. 5, the rotating cylinder 25 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface (peripheral surface) having a radius of curvature Rfa around a rotation axis AX2 extending in the Y direction. Here, a plane including the center line of the rotation axis AX2 and a plane parallel to the YZ plane is the center plane CL (see FIG. 5). A part of the circumferential surface of the rotary cylinder 25 is a support surface P2 that supports the substrate P with a predetermined tension. In other words, the rotating cylinder 25 winds the substrate P around the support surface P2 with a constant tension, and thereby supports the substrate P in a stable cylindrical curved shape.

將旋轉軸AX2以兩側之軸承部140加以軸支之各空氣軸承141,將旋轉軸AX2以非接觸狀態軸支成旋轉自如。又,本實施形態中,雖係在旋轉筒25之兩端以空氣軸承141支承旋轉軸AX2,但亦可以是使用加工成高精度之球或針之一般的軸承。如圖2及圖5所示,複數個引導輥28係隔著旋轉筒25,分別設置在基板P之搬送方向上游側及下游側。例如引導輥28設有4個,於搬送方向之上游側及搬送方向之下游側分別配置有各2個。 Each of the air bearings 141 is rotatably supported by the bearing portions 140 on both sides of the rotation shaft AX2, and the rotation shaft AX2 is rotatably supported in a non-contact state. In the present embodiment, the rotary shaft AX2 is supported by air bearings 141 at both ends of the rotary cylinder 25, but a general bearing that is processed into a ball or needle with high precision may be used. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 5, a plurality of guide rollers 28 are provided on the upstream side and the downstream side of the substrate P in the conveying direction via the rotating cylinder 25, respectively. For example, four guide rollers 28 are provided, and two guide rollers 28 are arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction, respectively.

承上所述,基板支承機構12將從位置調整單元120搬送而來 之基板P,以2個引導輥28引導至旋轉筒25。基板支承機構12,以基板側驅動部26透過旋轉軸AX2使旋轉筒25旋轉,據以將導入旋轉筒25之基板P一邊以旋轉筒25之支承面P2加以支承、一邊搬送向引導輥28。基板支承機構12將搬送到引導輥28之基板P引導向基板回收裝置4。 As described above, the substrate support mechanism 12 will be carried from the position adjustment unit 120 The substrate P is guided to the rotating drum 25 by two guide rollers 28. The substrate supporting mechanism 12 rotates the rotating cylinder 25 by the substrate-side driving portion 26 through the rotation axis AX2, and thereby carries the substrate P introduced into the rotating cylinder 25 to the guide roller 28 while supporting the substrate P on the supporting surface P2 of the rotating cylinder 25. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transferred to the guide roller 28 to the substrate recovery device 4.

接著,參照圖4說明基板側驅動部26之一構成例。圖4中,於捲繞基板P之旋轉筒25之至少一端側,以和旋轉軸AX2同軸之方式固設有與旋轉筒25之外周表面25a之半徑Rfa略同一徑的圓板狀標尺板25c。於此標尺板25c之外周面,於周方向以一定間距形成有繞射光柵,由編碼器測量用之讀取頭EH以光學方式檢測該繞射光柵,據以測量旋轉筒25之旋轉角度、或旋轉筒25之表面25a於周方向之移動量。以讀取頭EH測量之旋轉筒25之旋轉角度資訊等,亦用作為使旋轉筒25旋轉之馬達之伺服控制的回饋訊號。又,圖4中,變位感測器SG1雖係配置成測量基板P表面之高度位置之變位(徑方向變位),但亦可配置成測量未被基板P覆蓋之旋轉筒25之端部側區域25b表面之高度位置之變位(徑方向變位)。 Next, a configuration example of the substrate-side driving section 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. In FIG. 4, at least one end of the rotating tube 25 wound around the substrate P is provided with a disk-shaped ruler plate 25c having a diameter substantially the same as the radius Rfa of the outer peripheral surface 25a of the rotating tube 25 coaxially with the rotating axis AX2. . A diffraction grating is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the scale plate 25c at a certain interval in the circumferential direction. The diffraction grating is optically detected by the reading head EH for encoder measurement, and the rotation angle of the rotary cylinder 25 is measured according to this. Or the amount of movement of the surface 25a of the rotating cylinder 25 in the circumferential direction. The rotation angle information of the rotating cylinder 25 measured by the reading head EH is also used as a feedback signal for the servo control of the motor that rotates the rotating cylinder 25. In addition, in FIG. 4, although the displacement sensor SG1 is configured to measure the displacement (radial displacement) of the height position on the surface of the substrate P, it can also be configured to measure the end of the rotating cylinder 25 not covered by the substrate P. Displacement (displacement in the radial direction) of the height position of the surface of the partial region 25b.

在被空氣軸承141軸支之旋轉軸AX2之端部側,設有產生繞旋轉軸AX2之扭矩之旋轉馬達之磁石單元Mur排列成環狀的旋轉子RT、與對旋轉軸AX2賦予軸方向推力之音圈馬達用的磁石單元MUs。於圖3中固定在支柱框架146之固定子側,設有以和旋轉子RT周圍之磁石單元MUr對向之方式配置的線圈單元CUr、與以捲繞於磁石單元MUs之方式捲繞而成的線圈單元CUs。藉由此種構成,即能使與旋轉軸AX2一體化之旋轉筒25(及標尺板25c),以賦予旋轉子RT之扭矩順暢的旋轉。 On the end side of the rotating shaft AX2 supported by the air bearing 141, a magnet unit Mur, which is a rotary motor that generates a torque around the rotating shaft AX2, is provided with a rotary element RT arranged in a ring shape, and an axial thrust is given to the rotating shaft AX2. Magnet unit MUs for voice coil motors. As shown in FIG. 3, it is fixed to the stator side of the pillar frame 146, and is provided with a coil unit CUr arranged to face the magnet unit MUr around the rotor RT, and a coil unit CUr wound around the magnet unit MUs. Coil unit CUs. With this configuration, the rotating cylinder 25 (and the scale plate 25c) integrated with the rotating shaft AX2 can be smoothly rotated with the torque given to the rotor RT.

又,由於音圈馬達(MUs、CUs)在旋轉筒25之旋轉中亦會 產生旋轉軸AX2方向(Y方向)之推力,因此能使旋轉筒25(及標尺板25c)於Y方向微動。據此,基板P在掃描曝光中於Y方向之微小的位置偏移可逐次加以修正。 In addition, since the voice coil motors (MUs, CUs) also rotate during the rotation of the rotating barrel 25, Since the thrust in the rotation axis AX2 direction (Y direction) is generated, the rotary cylinder 25 (and the scale plate 25c) can be moved slightly in the Y direction. Accordingly, a slight positional deviation of the substrate P in the Y direction during the scanning exposure can be corrected one by one.

又,圖4之構成中,設有測量旋轉軸AX2之端面Tp之Y方向變位的變位感測器DT1、或測量標尺板25c之端面之Y方向變位的變位感測器DT2,能即時逐次測量掃描曝光中之旋轉筒25之Y方向的位置變化。因此,只要是根據來自該等變位感測器DT1、DT2之測量訊號,進行音圈馬達(MUs、CUs)之伺服控制的話,即能精密的定位旋轉筒25之Y方向位置。 In the configuration of FIG. 4, a displacement sensor DT1 that measures the Y-direction displacement of the end surface Tp of the rotation axis AX2, or a displacement sensor DT2 that measures the Y-direction displacement of the end surface of the scale plate 25c, The position change in the Y direction of the rotating barrel 25 during the scanning exposure can be measured one by one in real time. Therefore, as long as the servo control of the voice coil motors (MUs, CUs) is performed based on the measurement signals from the displacement sensors DT1 and DT2, the Y-direction position of the rotary cylinder 25 can be accurately positioned.

此處,如圖6所示,第1實施形態之曝光裝置U3係設定為所謂多透鏡(multi-lens)方式的曝光裝置。此外,圖6中,顯示了從-Z側觀察被保持於光罩載台21之光罩M上之照明區域IR(IR1~IR6)的俯視圖(圖6之左圖)、與從+Z側觀察被支承於旋轉筒25之基板P上之投影區域PA(PA1~PA6)的俯視圖(圖6之右圖)。圖6中之符號Xs,代表光罩載台21及旋轉筒25之掃描方向(旋轉方向)。多透鏡方式之曝光裝置U3,對光罩M上之複數個(第1實施形態中,例如為6個)照明區域IR1~IR6分別照射照明光束EL1,並將各照明光束EL1照明於各照明區域IR1~IR6所得之複數個投影光束EL2,投影曝光至基板P上之複數個(第1實施形態中,例如為6個)投影區域PA1~PA6。 Here, as shown in FIG. 6, the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment is set as an exposure apparatus of a so-called multi-lens method. In addition, FIG. 6 shows a plan view of the illumination region IR (IR1 to IR6) held on the reticle M of the reticle stage 21 viewed from the −Z side (left view of FIG. 6), and the + Z side A plan view of a projection area PA (PA1 to PA6) supported on the substrate P of the rotary cylinder 25 is observed (right view in FIG. 6). The symbol Xs in FIG. 6 represents the scanning direction (rotational direction) of the mask stage 21 and the rotating cylinder 25. The multi-lens exposure device U3 illuminates a plurality of (one in the first embodiment, for example, six) illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the reticle M, and illuminates each of the illumination areas EL1 and each illumination area EL1. The plurality of projection light beams EL2 obtained from IR1 to IR6 are projected and exposed to a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P.

首先,說明以照明機構13照明之複數個照明區域IR1~IR6。如圖6所示,複數個照明區域IR1~IR6夾著中心面CL於基板P之掃描方向排列成2行,於掃描方向上游側之光罩M上配置照明區域IR1、IR3及IR5,於掃描方向下游側之光罩M上則配置照明區域IR2、IR4及IR6。各照明區域IR1~ IR6,係具有延伸於光罩M之寬度方向(Y方向)之平行短邊及長邊的細長梯形區域。此時,梯形之各照明區域IR1~IR6,係成其短邊位於中心面CL側、其長邊位於外側之區域。奇數號之照明區域IR1、IR3及IR5於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。此外,偶數號之照明區域IR2、IR4及IR6亦於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。此時,照明區域IR2係於Y方向配置在照明區域IR1與照明區域IR3之間。同樣的,照明區域IR3亦於Y方向配置在照明區域IR2與照明區域IR4之間。照明區域IR4於Y方向配置在照明區域IR3與照明區域IR5之間。照明區域IR5於Y方向配置在照明區域IR4與照明區域IR6之間。各照明區域IR1~IR6,從光罩M之掃描方向觀察時,係配置成相鄰梯形照明區域之斜邊部之三角部重疊(overlap)。又,第1實施形態中,雖然各照明區域IR1~IR6係設為梯形區域,但亦可以是長方形區域。 First, a plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination mechanism 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the substrate P with the center plane CL interposed therebetween. The illumination areas IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged on the mask M on the upstream side in the scanning direction. Illumination areas IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged on the mask M on the downstream side in the direction. Each lighting area IR1 ~ IR6 is an elongated trapezoidal region having parallel short sides and long sides extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the mask M. At this time, each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 of the trapezoid is an area whose short side is located on the center plane CL side and whose long side is located outside. The odd-numbered illumination areas IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. In addition, even-numbered illumination areas IR2, IR4, and IR6 are also arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. At this time, the illumination area IR2 is arranged between the illumination area IR1 and the illumination area IR3 in the Y direction. Similarly, the illumination area IR3 is also arranged between the illumination area IR2 and the illumination area IR4 in the Y direction. The illumination area IR4 is arranged between the illumination area IR3 and the illumination area IR5 in the Y direction. The illumination area IR5 is arranged between the illumination area IR4 and the illumination area IR6 in the Y direction. Each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is arranged so that the triangular portion of the hypotenuse of the adjacent trapezoidal illumination area overlaps when viewed from the scanning direction of the mask M. In the first embodiment, although each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is a trapezoidal area, it may be a rectangular area.

又,光罩M,具有形成光罩圖案之圖案形成區域A3、與不形成光罩圖案之圖案非形成區域A4。圖案非形成區域A4係吸收照明光束EL1之低反射區域,配置成圍繞圖案形成區域A3成框狀。照明區域IR1~IR6,係配置成能涵蓋圖案形成區域A3之Y方向全寬。 The photomask M includes a pattern forming area A3 in which a photomask pattern is formed, and a pattern non-forming area A4 in which a photomask pattern is not formed. The pattern non-formation area A4 is a low-reflection area that absorbs the illumination light beam EL1 and is arranged in a frame shape around the pattern formation area A3. The illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are configured to cover the full width in the Y direction of the pattern forming area A3.

照明機構13,射出照明於光罩M之照明光束EL1。照明機構13具備光源裝置及照明光學系IL。光源裝置包含例如水銀燈等之燈光源、雷射二極體、或發光二極體(LED)等之固體光源。光源裝置射出之照明光,例如係從燈光源射出之輝線(g線、h線、i線)、KrF準分子雷射光(波長248nm)等之遠紫外光(DUV光)、ArF準分子雷射光(波長193nm)等。從光源裝置射出之照明光,其照度分布被均勻化後,透過例如光纖等之導光構件被導至照明光學系IL。 The illuminating mechanism 13 emits an illumination light beam EL1 that illuminates the mask M. The illumination mechanism 13 includes a light source device and an illumination optical system IL. The light source device includes a lamp light source such as a mercury lamp, a solid-state light source such as a laser diode, or a light emitting diode (LED). Illumination light emitted by the light source device is, for example, far-ultraviolet light (DUV light) such as glow lines (g-line, h-line, i-line), KrF excimer laser light (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF excimer laser light (Wavelength 193nm) and so on. After the illuminance distribution of the illumination light emitted from the light source device is uniformized, it is guided to the illumination optical system IL through a light guide member such as an optical fiber.

照明光學系IL,係對應複數個照明區域IR1~IR6而設有複數個(第1實施形態中,例如為6個)之照明模組IL1~IL6。於複數個照明模組IL1~IL6,分別射入來自光源裝置之照明光束EL1。各照明模組IL1~IL6將從光源裝置射入之照明光束EL1分別導向各照明區域IR1~IR6。也就是說,照明模組IL1將照明光束EL1導向照明區域IR1,同樣的,照明模組IL2~IL6將照明光束EL1導向照明區域IR2~IR6。複數個照明模組IL1~IL6,係夾著中心面CL於光罩M之掃描方向配置成2行。照明模組IL1、IL3及IL5係相對中心面CL配置在照明區域IR1、IR3及IR5之配置側(圖5之左側)。照明模組IL1、IL3及IL5於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。又,照明模組IL2、IL4及IL6係相對中心面CL配置在照明區域IR2、IR4及IR6之配置側(圖5之右側)。照明模組IL2、IL4及IL6於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。此時,照明模組IL2係於Y方向配置在照明模組IL1與照明模組IL3之間。同樣的,照明模組IL3於Y方向配置在照明模組IL2與照明模組IL4之間。照明模組IL4於Y方向配置在照明模組IL3與照明模組IL5之間。照明模組IL5於Y方向配置在照明模組IL4與照明模組IL6之間。又,照明模組IL1、IL3及IL5與照明模組IL2、IL4及IL6,從Y方向看係以中心面CL為中心對稱配置。 The illumination optical system IL is provided with a plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 (for example, six in the first embodiment) corresponding to the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6. A plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 respectively emit an illumination beam EL1 from a light source device. Each of the lighting modules IL1 to IL6 guides the lighting beam EL1 incident from the light source device to each of the lighting areas IR1 to IR6. That is, the lighting module IL1 guides the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination area IR1. Similarly, the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 guide the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination areas IR2 to IR6. The plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M with the center plane CL interposed therebetween. The lighting modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged on the arrangement side (the left side in FIG. 5) of the lighting areas IR1, IR3, and IR5 with respect to the center plane CL. The lighting modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. In addition, the lighting modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are arranged on the arrangement side (right side in FIG. 5) of the lighting areas IR2, IR4, and IR6 with respect to the center plane CL. The lighting modules IL2, IL4 and IL6 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. At this time, the lighting module IL2 is arranged between the lighting module IL1 and the lighting module IL3 in the Y direction. Similarly, the lighting module IL3 is disposed between the lighting module IL2 and the lighting module IL4 in the Y direction. The lighting module IL4 is arranged between the lighting module IL3 and the lighting module IL5 in the Y direction. The lighting module IL5 is disposed between the lighting module IL4 and the lighting module IL6 in the Y direction. In addition, the lighting modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 and the lighting modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are symmetrically arranged with respect to the center plane CL as viewed from the Y direction.

複數個照明模組IL1~IL6之各個,例如包含積分器光學系、棒狀透鏡、複眼透鏡等之複數個光學構件,以均勻照度分布之照明光束EL1照明各照明區域IR1~IR6。第1實施形態中,複數個照明模組IL1~IL6配置在光罩M之Z方向之上方側。複數個照明模組IL1~IL6之各個,從光罩M之上方側照明形成在光罩M之光罩圖案之各照明區域IR。 Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6, for example, includes a plurality of optical components such as an integrator optical system, a rod lens, a fly-eye lens, etc., and illuminates each illumination area IR1 to IR6 with an illumination beam EL1 having a uniform illumination distribution. In the first embodiment, a plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged on the upper side in the Z direction of the mask M. Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 illuminates each illumination region IR of a mask pattern formed on the mask M from above the mask M.

其次,說明被投影光學系PL投影曝光之複數個投影區域PA1 ~PA6。如圖6所示,基板P上之複數個投影區域PA1~PA6係與光罩M上之複數個照明區域IR1~IR6對應配置。也就是說,基板P上之複數個投影區域PA1~PA6,係隔著中心面CL於搬送方向配置成2行,於搬送方向(掃描方向)上游側之基板P上配置投影區域PA1、PA3及PA5,於搬送方向下游側之基板P上配置投影區域PA2、PA4及PA6。各投影區域PA1~PA6,係具有延伸於基板P之寬度方向(Y方向)之短邊及長邊的細長梯形區域。此時,梯形之各投影區域PA1~PA6,係成其短邊位於中心面CL側、其長邊位於外側之區域。投影區域PA1、PA3及PA5,於寬度方向相隔既定間隔配置。此外,投影區域PA2、PA4及PA6,亦於寬度方向相隔既定間隔配置。此時,投影區域PA2係於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影區域PA1與投影區域PA3之間。同樣的,投影區域PA3亦係於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影區域PA2與投影區域PA4之間。投影區域PA4於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影區域PA3與投影區域PA5之間。投影區域PA5於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影區域PA4與投影區域PA6之間。各投影區域PA1~PA6,與各照明區域IR1~IR6同樣的,從基板P之搬送方向觀察,係配置成相鄰梯形之投影區域PA之斜邊部之三角部重疊(overlap)。此時,投影區域PA係成一在相鄰投影區域PA之重複區域之曝光量,與在不重複區域之曝光量實質相同的形狀。投影區域PA1~PA6並以能涵蓋被曝光至基板P上之曝光區域A7之Y方向全寬之方式配置。 Next, the plurality of projection areas PA1 exposed by the projection optical system PL projection will be described. ~ PA6. As shown in FIG. 6, the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged corresponding to the plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the mask M. That is, the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in two rows in the conveying direction across the center plane CL, and the projection areas PA1, PA3, and In PA5, the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged on the substrate P on the downstream side in the conveying direction. Each of the projection areas PA1 to PA6 is an elongated trapezoidal area having short sides and long sides extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. At this time, each of the projection areas PA1 to PA6 of the trapezoid is an area in which the short side is located on the center plane CL side and the long side is located outside. The projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction. In addition, the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are also arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction. At this time, the projection area PA2 is in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2, and is arranged between the projection area PA1 and the projection area PA3. Similarly, the projection area PA3 is also in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2, and is arranged between the projection area PA2 and the projection area PA4. The projection area PA4 is arranged between the projection area PA3 and the projection area PA5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection area PA5 is arranged between the projection area PA4 and the projection area PA6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. Each of the projection areas PA1 to PA6 is the same as each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6, and when viewed from the conveying direction of the substrate P, the triangular portions of the hypotenuse of the projection area PA adjacent to the trapezoid are overlapped. At this time, the projection area PA has a shape in which the exposure amount in the overlapping area of the adjacent projection area PA is substantially the same as the exposure amount in the non-repeating area. The projection areas PA1 to PA6 are arranged so as to cover the full width in the Y direction of the exposure area A7 that is exposed on the substrate P.

此處,圖5中,於XZ面內觀察時,從光罩M上照明區域IR1(及IR3、IR5)之中心點到照明區域IR2(及IR4、IR6)之中心點的長度,係設定成與從貼著支承面P2之基板P上之投影區域PA1(及PA3、PA5)之中 心點到投影區域PA2(及PA4、PA6)之中心點的周長實質相等。 Here, in FIG. 5, when viewed in the XZ plane, the length from the center point of the illumination area IR1 (and IR3, IR5) on the mask M to the center point of the illumination area IR2 (and IR4, IR6) is set to From the projection area PA1 (and PA3, PA5) on the substrate P attached to the support surface P2 The perimeter of the center point to the center point of the projection area PA2 (and PA4, PA6) is substantially equal.

又,如圖5所示,投影光學系PL,對應複數個投影區域PA1~PA6設有複數個(第1實施形態中,例如為6個)投影模組PL1~PL6。於複數個投影模組PL1~PL6,分別射入來自複數個照明區域IR1~IR6之複數個投影光束EL2。各投影模組PL1~PL6將來自光罩M之各投影光束EL2分別導向各投影區域PA1~PA6。也就是說,投影模組PL1將來自照明區域IR1之投影光束EL2導向投影區域PA1,同樣的,投影模組PL2~PL6將來自照明區域IR2~IR6之各投影光束EL2導向投影區域PA2~PA6。複數個投影模組PL1~PL6隔著中心面CL於光罩M之掃描方向配置成2行。投影模組PL1、PL3及PL5,相對中心面CL配置在投影區域PA1、PA3及PA5之配置側(圖5之左側)。投影模組PL1、PL3及PL5於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。此外,投影模組PL2、PL4及PL6,相對中心面CL配置在投影區域PA2、PA4及PA6之配置側(圖5之右側)。投影模組PL2、PL4及PL6於Y方向相隔既定間隔配置。此時,投影模組PL2於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影模組PL1與投影模組PL3之間。同樣的,投影模組PL3於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影模組PL2與投影模組PL4之間。投影模組PL4於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影模組PL3與投影模組PL5之間。投影模組PL5於旋轉軸AX2之軸方向,配置在投影模組PL4與投影模組PL6之間。又,投影模組PL1、PL3及PL5與投影模組PL2、PL4及PL6,從Y方向觀察係以中心面CL為中心對稱配置。 As shown in FIG. 5, the projection optical system PL is provided with a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) projection modules PL1 to PL6 corresponding to the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6. A plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 respectively emit a plurality of projection light beams EL2 from a plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6. Each projection module PL1 to PL6 directs each projection light beam EL2 from the mask M to each projection area PA1 to PA6. That is, the projection module PL1 guides the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination area IR1 to the projection area PA1. Similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 guide the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination area IR2 to IR6 to the projection areas PA2 to PA6. The plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL. The projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are disposed on the arrangement side of the projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 (the left side in FIG. 5) with respect to the center plane CL. The projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. In addition, the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are disposed on the arrangement side of the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 (the right side in FIG. 5) with respect to the center plane CL. The projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y direction. At this time, the projection module PL2 is disposed between the projection module PL1 and the projection module PL3 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. Similarly, the projection module PL3 is disposed between the projection module PL2 and the projection module PL4 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection module PL4 is disposed between the projection module PL3 and the projection module PL5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection module PL5 is disposed between the projection module PL4 and the projection module PL6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 and the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are symmetrically arranged with the center plane CL as the center when viewed from the Y direction.

複數個投影模組PL1~PL6係與複數個照明模組IL1~IL6對應設置。也就是說,投影模組PL1將被照明模組IL1照明之照明區域IR1之光罩圖案之像,投影至基板P上之投影區域PA1。同樣的,投影模組PL2~PL6 將被照明模組IL2~IL6照明之照明區域IR2~IR6之光罩圖案之像,投影至基板P上之投影區域PA2~PA6。 The plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are arranged correspondingly to the plurality of lighting modules IL1 to IL6. That is, the projection module PL1 projects the image of the mask pattern of the illumination area IR1 illuminated by the illumination module IL1 onto the projection area PA1 on the substrate P. Similarly, the projection modules PL2 ~ PL6 The images of the mask patterns in the illumination areas IR2 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 are projected onto the projection areas PA2 to PA6 on the substrate P.

其次,參照圖7,說明各投影模組PL1~PL6。又,由於各投影模組PL1~PL6皆為相同構成,因此以投影模組PL1為例加以說明。 Next, each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. In addition, since each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 has the same configuration, the projection module PL1 will be described as an example.

投影模組PL1,將在光罩M上照明區域IR(照明區域IR1)之光罩圖案之像,投影至基板P上之投影區域PA。如圖7所示,投影模組PL1具備將在照明區域IR之光罩圖案之像成像於中間像面P7的第1光學系61、將以第1光學系61成像之中間像之至少一部分再成像於基板P之投影區域PA的第2光學系62、以及配置在形成中間像之中間像面P7的投影視野光闌63。此外,投影模組PL1具備焦點修正光學構件64、像移動用光學構件65、倍率修正用光學構件66、以及旋轉修正機構67。 The projection module PL1 projects an image of a mask pattern in the illumination region IR (illumination region IR1) on the mask M onto a projection region PA on the substrate P. As shown in FIG. 7, the projection module PL1 includes a first optical system 61 that images an image of a mask pattern in the illumination area IR on the intermediate image plane P7, and at least a part of the intermediate image that images the first optical system 61. The second optical system 62 is formed on the projection area PA of the substrate P, and the projection field diaphragm 63 is disposed on the intermediate image plane P7 forming the intermediate image. The projection module PL1 includes a focus correction optical member 64, an image movement optical member 65, a magnification correction optical member 66, and a rotation correction mechanism 67.

第1光學系61及第2光學系62例如戴森系予以變形之遠心的折反射光學系。第1光學系61,其光軸(以下,稱第2光軸BX2)對中心面CL實質正交。第1光學系61,具備第1偏向構件70、第1透鏡群71、以及第1凹面鏡72。第1偏向構件70係具有第1反射面P3與第2反射面P4之三角稜鏡。第1反射面P3,係使來自光罩M之投影光束EL2反射、並使反射之投影光束EL2通過第1透鏡群71射入第1凹面鏡72之面。第2反射面P4,係被第1凹面鏡72反射之投影光束EL2通過第1透鏡群71後射入,將射入之投影光束EL2反射向投影視野光闌63之面。第1透鏡群71包含各種透鏡,各種透透鏡之光軸配置在第2光軸BX2上。第1凹面鏡72,係配置在由複眼透鏡生成之多數點光源,藉由從複眼透鏡透過照明視野光闌至第1凹面鏡72之各種透鏡而成像之光瞳面。 The first optical system 61 and the second optical system 62 are, for example, a telecentric refracting optical system in which a Dyson system is deformed. In the first optical system 61, an optical axis (hereinafter, referred to as a second optical axis BX2) is substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL. The first optical system 61 includes a first deflection member 70, a first lens group 71, and a first concave mirror 72. The first deflecting member 70 is a triangular ridge having a first reflecting surface P3 and a second reflecting surface P4. The first reflection surface P3 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M and makes the reflected projection light beam EL2 enter the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71. The second reflecting surface P4 is a surface of the projection field beam 63 reflected by the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 after passing through the first lens group 71 and reflecting the incident projection light beam EL2. The first lens group 71 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various transmission lenses are arranged on the second optical axis BX2. The first concave mirror 72 is a pupil surface that is formed by a plurality of point light sources generated by the fly-eye lens, and transmits images from the fly-eye lens through the illumination field diaphragm to various lenses of the first concave mirror 72.

來自光罩M之投影光束EL2,通過焦點修正光學構件64及像移動用光學構件65後被第1偏向構件70之第1反射面P3反射,通過第1透鏡群71上半部之視野區域射入第1凹面鏡72。射入第1凹面鏡72之投影光束EL2被第1凹面鏡72反射,通過第1透鏡群71下半部之視野區域射入第1偏向構件70之第2反射面P4。射入第2反射面P4之投影光束EL2被第2反射面P4反射,射入投影視野光闌63。 The projection light beam EL2 from the mask M passes through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image movement optical member 65, is reflected by the first reflecting surface P3 of the first deflection member 70, and is emitted through a field of view in the upper half of the first lens group 71.入 第一 槽 面镜 72。 Enter the first concave mirror 72. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the first concave mirror 72 is reflected by the first concave mirror 72 and enters the second reflecting surface P4 of the first deflection member 70 through the field of view in the lower half of the first lens group 71. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the second reflection surface P4 is reflected by the second reflection surface P4 and enters the projection field diaphragm 63.

投影視野光闌63具有規定投影區域PA之形狀的開口。亦即,由投影視野光闌63之開口形狀規定投影區域PA之形狀。 The projection field diaphragm 63 has an opening that defines the shape of the projection area PA. That is, the shape of the projection area PA is defined by the opening shape of the projection field diaphragm 63.

第2光學系62具有與第1光學系61相同之構成,夾著中間像面P7與第1光學系61對稱設置。第2光學系62,其光軸(以下,稱第3光軸BX3)對中心面CL實質正交,與第2光軸BX2平行。第2光學系62,具備第2偏向構件80、第2透鏡群81、以及第2凹面鏡82。第2偏向構件80具有第3反射面P5與第4反射面P6。第3反射面P5,係使來自投影視野光闌63之投影光束EL2反射,並使反射之投影光束EL2通過第2透鏡群81射入第2凹面鏡82之面。第4反射面P6,係被第2凹面鏡82反射之投影光束EL2通過第2透鏡群81後射入,使射入之投影光束EL2反射向投影區域PA之面。第2透鏡群81包含各種透鏡,各種透鏡之光軸配置在第3光軸BX3上。第2凹面鏡82,係配置在於第1凹面鏡72成像之多數點光源像,藉由從第1凹面鏡72透過投影視野光闌63至第2凹面鏡82之各種透鏡而成像之光瞳面。 The second optical system 62 has the same configuration as the first optical system 61, and is disposed symmetrically to the first optical system 61 with the intermediate image plane P7 interposed therebetween. The second optical system 62 has an optical axis (hereinafter, referred to as a third optical axis BX3) substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL, and is parallel to the second optical axis BX2. The second optical system 62 includes a second deflection member 80, a second lens group 81, and a second concave mirror 82. The second deflecting member 80 includes a third reflecting surface P5 and a fourth reflecting surface P6. The third reflection surface P5 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the projection field diaphragm 63 and makes the reflected projection light beam EL2 enter the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81. The fourth reflecting surface P6 is a surface of the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 and passing through the second lens group 81 to reflect the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection area PA. The second lens group 81 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are arranged on the third optical axis BX3. The second concave mirror 82 is a pupil surface where most of the point light source images formed by the first concave mirror 72 are imaged through the various lenses of the projection field diaphragm 63 to the second concave mirror 82 from the first concave mirror 72.

來自投影視野光闌63之投影光束EL2,被第2偏向構件80之第3反射面P5反射後,通過第2透鏡群81上半部之視野區域射入第2凹面鏡82。射入第2凹面鏡82之投影光束EL2於第2凹面鏡82反射後,通過第2透鏡群81 下半部之視野區域射入第2偏向構件80之第4反射面P6。射入第4反射面P6之投影光束EL2於第4反射面P6反射後,通過倍率修正用光學構件66投射於投影區域PA。據此,在照明區域IR之光罩圖案之像,即以等倍(×1)投影於投影區域PA。 The projection light beam EL2 from the projection field diaphragm 63 is reflected by the third reflecting surface P5 of the second deflection member 80 and then enters the second concave mirror 82 through the field of view of the upper half of the second lens group 81. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the second concave mirror 82 is reflected by the second concave mirror 82 and passes through the second lens group 81 The lower field of view enters the fourth reflecting surface P6 of the second deflection member 80. The projection light beam EL2 that has entered the fourth reflecting surface P6 is reflected by the fourth reflecting surface P6, and then is projected onto the projection area PA by the magnification correction optical member 66. Accordingly, the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR is projected on the projection area PA at equal magnification (× 1).

焦點修正光學構件64配置在光罩M與第1光學系61之間。焦點修正光學構件64係修正投影於基板P上之光罩圖案之像的聚焦狀態。焦點修正光學構件64,例如係將2片楔形稜鏡反向(圖7中,係於X方向反向)重疊而使整體成透明之平行平板者。將此1對稜鏡在不改變彼此對向之面間之間隔的狀態下滑動於斜面方向,即能使作為平行平板之厚度可變。據此,微調整第1光學系61之實效光路長,微調整形成在中間像面P7及投影區域PA之光罩圖案之像之對焦狀態。 The focus correction optical member 64 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The focus correction optical member 64 corrects the focus state of the image of the mask pattern projected on the substrate P. The focus correction optical member 64 is, for example, one in which two pieces of wedge-shaped cymbals are inverted (in the X direction in FIG. 7) and overlapped to make the entire transparent parallel flat plate. The thickness of the parallel flat plate can be changed by sliding the pair of cymbals in the oblique direction without changing the interval between the surfaces facing each other. Accordingly, the effective optical path length of the first optical system 61 is finely adjusted, and the focus state of the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA is finely adjusted.

像移動用光學構件65配置在光罩M與第1光學系61之間。像移動用光學構件65,係調整投影於基板P上之光罩圖案之像於像面內可移動。像移動用光學構件65,係由圖6之可在XZ面內傾斜之透明的平行平板玻璃、與圖7之可在YZ面內傾斜之透明的平行平板玻璃構成。藉由調整該2片平行平板玻璃之各傾斜量,即能使形成在中間像面P7及投影區域PA之光罩圖案之像於X方向及Y方向微幅移動(shift)。 The image moving optical member 65 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The optical member 65 for image movement adjusts the image of the mask pattern projected on the substrate P to be movable in the image plane. The image moving optical member 65 is composed of a transparent parallel plate glass that can be tilted in the XZ plane in FIG. 6 and a transparent parallel plate glass that can be tilted in the YZ plane in FIG. 7. By adjusting the inclination amounts of the two parallel plate glasses, the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA can be shifted slightly in the X direction and the Y direction.

倍率修正用光學構件66配置在第2偏向構件80與基板P之間。倍率修正用光學構件66,係將例如凹透鏡、凸透鏡、凹透鏡之3片以既定間隔同軸配置,將前後之凹透鏡固定、並使中間之凸透鏡可於光軸(主光線)方向移動而構成。據此,形成在投影區域PA之光罩圖案之像,即能在維持遠心的成像狀態之同時、等方的微幅放大或縮小。此外,構成倍率修 正用光學構件66之3片透鏡群之光軸,在XZ面內係傾斜而與投影光束EL2之主光線成平行。 The magnification correction optical member 66 is disposed between the second deflection member 80 and the substrate P. The magnification correction optical member 66 is configured by arranging three lenses, such as a concave lens, a convex lens, and a concave lens, coaxially at a predetermined interval, fixing the front and rear concave lenses, and moving the middle convex lens in the optical axis (principal light) direction. According to this, the image of the mask pattern formed in the projection area PA can be enlarged or reduced in an equal manner while maintaining a telecentric imaging state. In addition, constitutive magnification correction The optical axes of the three lens groups of the positive-use optical member 66 are inclined in the XZ plane and are parallel to the main ray of the projection light beam EL2.

旋轉修正機構67,係例如藉由致動器(圖示略)使第1偏向構件70繞與第2光軸BX2垂直之軸微幅旋轉者。此旋轉修正機構67,可藉由使第1偏向構件70旋轉,以使形成在中間像面P7之光罩圖案之像於該面P7內微幅旋轉。 The rotation correction mechanism 67 is, for example, an actuator (not shown) that rotates the first deflection member 70 slightly around an axis perpendicular to the second optical axis BX2. The rotation correction mechanism 67 can rotate the first deflection member 70 so that the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 rotates slightly within the plane P7.

在以此方式構成之投影模組PL1~PL6中,來自光罩M之投影光束EL2係從照明區域IR往光罩面P1之法線方向射出,射入第1光學系61。射入第1光學系61之投影光束EL2,穿透焦點修正光學構件64及像移動用光學構件65後,於第1光學系61之第1偏向構件70之第1反射面(平面鏡)P3反射,通過第1透鏡群71於第1凹面鏡72反射。被第1凹面鏡72反射之投影光束EL2,再次通過第1透鏡群71後於第1偏向構件70之第2反射面(平面鏡)P4反射,射入投影視野光闌63。通過投影視野光闌63之投影光束EL2,於第2光學系62之第2偏向構件80之第3反射面(平面鏡)P5反射,通過第2透鏡群81於第2凹面鏡82反射。被第2凹面鏡82反射之投影光束EL2,再次通過第2透鏡群81後於第2偏向構件80之第4反射面(平面鏡)P6反射,射入倍率修正用光學構件66。從倍率修正用光學構件66射出之投影光束EL2,射入基板P上之投影區域PA,出現在照明區域IR內之光罩圖案之像以等倍(×1)被投影於投影區域PA。 In the projection modules PL1 to PL6 configured in this manner, the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M is emitted from the illumination area IR toward the normal direction of the mask surface P1, and enters the first optical system 61. The projection light beam EL2 that has entered the first optical system 61 passes through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image moving optical member 65 and is reflected by the first reflecting surface (planar mirror) P3 of the first deflection member 70 of the first optical system 61. Is reflected by the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 passes through the first lens group 71 and is reflected by the second reflecting surface (planar mirror) P4 of the first deflection member 70 again, and enters the projection field diaphragm 63. The projection light beam EL2 passing through the projection field diaphragm 63 is reflected on the third reflecting surface (planar mirror) P5 of the second deflection member 80 of the second optical system 62 and is reflected on the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 passes through the second lens group 81 and is reflected by the fourth reflecting surface (planar mirror) P6 of the second deflection member 80 again, and enters the magnification correction optical member 66. The projection light beam EL2 emitted from the magnification correction optical member 66 enters the projection area PA on the substrate P, and the image of the mask pattern appearing in the illumination area IR is projected onto the projection area PA at equal magnification (× 1).

<驅動單元之控制> <Control of drive unit>

其次,參照圖3,說明驅動單元122之控制。驅動單元122,包含安裝在設置於設置面E上之支柱框架146的光罩側驅動部22、與基板側驅動部26而構 成。 Next, control of the driving unit 122 will be described with reference to FIG. 3. The driving unit 122 includes a mask-side driving portion 22 and a substrate-side driving portion 26 mounted on a pillar frame 146 provided on the installation surface E. to make.

如先前之說明,光罩側驅動部22,係由固定在支柱框架146之延伸於X方向之線性馬達的磁石軌道(固定子)、與固定在結合於光罩載台21之傳遞構件23而與該磁石軌道以一定間距對向之線性馬達的線圈單元(可動子)構成。又,基板側驅動部26,如先前之圖4所示,包含由固定在支柱框架146側作為固定子之線圈單元Cur與固定在旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2側之旋轉子RT作為可動子之磁石單元MUr構成的旋轉馬達、與從支柱框架146側對旋轉筒25賦予往旋轉軸AX2之方向(Y方向)之推力的音圈馬達(MUs、CUs)。如以上所述,光罩側驅動部22及基板側驅動部26,雖係能以非接觸方式直接對傳遞構件23及旋轉軸AX2傳遞動力之構成(Direct drive方式),但不限於上述構成。例如基板側驅動部26可以是具有電動馬達與磁性齒輪,將電動馬達固定於支柱框架146側,並在電動馬達之輸出軸與旋轉軸AX2之間裝設磁性齒輪。 As described above, the mask-side driving section 22 is composed of a magnet track (fixer) fixed to the pillar frame 146 and extending in the X direction, and a transmission member 23 fixed to the mask stage 21. A coil unit (movable element) of a linear motor opposed to the magnet track at a constant pitch is formed. As shown in FIG. 4, the substrate-side driving unit 26 includes a coil unit Cur fixed to the support frame 146 side as a stator and a rotor RT fixed to the rotation axis AX2 side of the rotating cylinder 25 as a movable element. A rotary motor constituted by a magnet unit MUr and a voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) that applies a thrust force in a direction (Y direction) to the rotary shaft AX2 to the rotary cylinder 25 from the pillar frame 146 side. As described above, the photomask-side driving section 22 and the substrate-side driving section 26 are structures (direct drive method) capable of directly transmitting power to the transmission member 23 and the rotation axis AX2 in a non-contact manner, but are not limited to the above-mentioned configurations. For example, the substrate-side driving unit 26 may include an electric motor and a magnetic gear, the electric motor may be fixed to the pillar frame 146 side, and a magnetic gear may be installed between the output shaft and the rotation axis AX2 of the electric motor.

上述方式之驅動單元122之構成中,圖5所示之下位控制裝置16,係使光罩載台21與旋轉筒25同步移動。因此,形成在光罩M之光罩面P1之光罩圖案之像,被連續的反覆投影曝光於捲繞在旋轉筒25之支承面P2(圖4中之25a)之基板P表面(順著圓周面彎曲之面)。於第1實施形態之曝光裝置U3,再以光罩M往+X方向之同步移動進行掃描曝光後,必須有使光罩M回到-X方向初期位置之動作(捲回)。因此,在使旋轉筒25以一定速度連續旋轉來以等速持續搬送基板P之情形時,光罩M之捲回動作期間,於基板P上不會進行圖案曝光,而係於基板P之搬送方向跳躍的(分離)形成面板用圖案。然而,實用上,係假定掃描曝光時基板P之速度(此處,指周速 )與光罩M之速度為50mm/s~100mm/s,因此在光罩M之捲回時以例如500mm/s最高速驅動光罩載台21的話,能縮小(使之狹窄)在基板P上形成之面板用圖案間於搬送方向之餘白。 In the configuration of the driving unit 122 in the above manner, the lower control device 16 shown in FIG. 5 moves the photomask stage 21 and the rotating cylinder 25 in synchronization. Therefore, the image of the mask pattern formed on the mask surface P1 of the mask M is continuously and repeatedly projected onto the surface P of the substrate P (wound along the support surface P2 (25a in FIG. 4) wound around the rotating cylinder 25) Curved surface). In the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment, after scanning and exposure are performed by synchronously moving the mask M in the + X direction, it is necessary to return (rewind) the mask M to the initial position in the -X direction. Therefore, when the rotary cylinder 25 is continuously rotated at a constant speed to continuously transport the substrate P at a constant speed, the pattern exposure on the substrate P is not performed during the rewinding operation of the photomask M, but the substrate P is transported. The direction jump (separation) forms a pattern for a panel. However, in practice, it is assumed that the speed of the substrate P (here, the peripheral speed) ) And the speed of the reticle M are 50 mm / s to 100 mm / s. Therefore, when the reticle stage 21 is driven at a maximum speed of 500 mm / s, for example, when the reticle M is rolled back, it can be reduced (narrowed) on the substrate P The margin between the pattern for the panel formed in the conveying direction.

本實施形態中,可以雷射干涉儀或線性編碼器精密的測量光罩載台21於X方向之移動位置及速度、以圖4中之標尺板25c之讀取頭EH精密的測量旋轉筒25之外周面之移動位置及速度,據以正確的確保光罩M與基板P於掃描曝光方向之位置上同步及速度上同步。 In this embodiment, a laser interferometer or a linear encoder can be used to accurately measure the movement position and speed of the photomask stage 21 in the X direction, and the reading head EH of the scale plate 25c in FIG. 4 can accurately measure the rotating cylinder 25. The position and speed of the outer peripheral surface are accurately ensured to synchronize the mask M and the substrate P in the position of the scanning exposure direction and the speed.

<按壓機構> <Pressing mechanism>

其次,參照圖2,說明按壓機構130。按壓機構130設在位置調整單元120與曝光單元121之間。按壓機構130係對從位置調整單元120供應至曝光單元121之基板P進行按壓以賦予張力。按壓機構130具有按壓構件151、與使按壓構件151升降之升降機構152。按壓構件151係對基板P以接觸或非接觸之狀態進行按壓。按壓構件151,係使用例如具有用以做出與基板P之非接觸狀態之空氣噴出口及吸入口的空氣轉向桿(air turn bar)、或接觸基板P之摩擦輥等。升降機構152,係使按壓構件151於從基板P之一面(背面)按壓向另一面(表面)之方向、亦即於Z方向升降。升降機構152連接於上位控制裝置5,根據第2基板檢測部124之檢測結果受上位控制裝置5控制。 Next, the pressing mechanism 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The pressing mechanism 130 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120 and the exposure unit 121. The pressing mechanism 130 presses the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 to apply tension. The pressing mechanism 130 includes a pressing member 151 and a lifting mechanism 152 that raises and lowers the pressing member 151. The pressing member 151 presses the substrate P in a contact or non-contact state. The pressing member 151 is, for example, an air turn bar having an air ejection port and a suction port for making a non-contact state with the substrate P, or a friction roller that contacts the substrate P. The lifting mechanism 152 lifts and lowers the pressing member 151 in a direction that is pressed from one surface (back surface) of the substrate P to the other surface (front surface), that is, in the Z direction. The lifting mechanism 152 is connected to the higher-level control device 5 and is controlled by the higher-level control device 5 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124.

上位控制裝置5根據第2基板檢測部124之檢測結果控制按壓機構130。具體而言,上位控制裝置5從以第2基板檢測部124檢測出之基板P之位置,算出基板P每單位時間(例如數毫秒)之位置變位量。上位控制裝置5依據算出之變位量,調整按壓構件151於Z方向之移動量。也就是說,上位控制裝置5,在算出之變位量越大、視為基板P之振動越大,即控制升降 機構152使按壓構件151往Z方向上升。上位控制裝置5,藉由使按壓構件151往Z方向上升,據以對基板P賦予張力,基板P之振動即受按壓構件151制振。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the pressing mechanism 130 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the higher-level control device 5 calculates the position displacement amount of the substrate P per unit time (for example, several milliseconds) from the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124. The upper control device 5 adjusts the movement amount of the pressing member 151 in the Z direction based on the calculated displacement amount. In other words, the higher the control device 5 is, the larger the calculated displacement amount is, the greater the vibration of the substrate P is, that is, it controls the lifting The mechanism 152 raises the pressing member 151 in the Z direction. The upper control device 5 raises the pressing member 151 in the Z direction to apply tension to the substrate P, and the vibration of the substrate P is damped by the pressing member 151.

<基板回收裝置> <Substrate recovery device>

接著,再次參照圖2,說明基板回收裝置4。基板回收裝置4具有位置調整單元160、裝有回收用捲筒FR2之第2軸承部161、以及使第2軸承部161升降之第2升降機構162。此外,基板回收裝置4亦具有排出角度檢測部164、與第3基板檢測部165,排出角度檢測部164及第3基板檢測部165連接於上位控制裝置5。此處,於第1實施形態中,上位控制裝置5,與基板供應裝置2同樣的,係作為基板回收裝置4之控制裝置(控制部)。又,作為基板回收裝置4之控制裝置,亦可以設置控制基板回收裝置4之下位控制裝置,而作成由下位控制裝置控制基板回收裝置4之構成。 Next, the substrate recovery device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. The substrate recovery device 4 includes a position adjustment unit 160, a second bearing portion 161 on which the recovery roll FR2 is mounted, and a second lifting mechanism 162 that raises and lowers the second bearing portion 161. The substrate recovery device 4 also includes a discharge angle detection unit 164 and a third substrate detection unit 165. The discharge angle detection unit 164 and the third substrate detection unit 165 are connected to the higher-level control device 5. Here, in the first embodiment, the higher-level control device 5 is the same as the substrate supply device 2 as the control device (control unit) of the substrate recovery device 4. In addition, as a control device of the substrate recovery device 4, a lower-level control device that controls the substrate recovery device 4 may be provided, and a configuration in which the lower-level control device controls the substrate recovery device 4 may be provided.

位置調整單元160,包含圖1所示之上述邊緣位置控制器EPC2而構成。又,位置調整單元160與曝光裝置U3之位置調整單元120之構成略相同,具有基台170、與邊緣位置控制器EPC2。基台170設在設置面E上,支承邊緣位置控制器EPC2。基台170可以是具有除振功能之除振台。 The position adjustment unit 160 includes the edge position controller EPC2 shown in FIG. 1. The configuration of the position adjustment unit 160 is similar to that of the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure device U3, and includes a base 170 and an edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 is provided on the installation surface E, and supports the edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 may be a vibration isolation platform having a vibration isolation function.

邊緣位置控制器EPC2能在基台170上於基板P之寬度方向(Y方向)移動。邊緣位置控制器EPC2,具有包含設在基板P之搬送方向最下游側之搬送輥167的複數個輥。搬送輥167將從位置調整單元160排出之基板P引導至回收用捲筒FR2。邊緣位置控制器EPC2連接於上位控制裝置5,根據第3基板檢測部165之檢測結果受上位控制裝置5。 The edge position controller EPC2 can move on the base 170 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC2 includes a plurality of rollers including a transport roller 167 provided at the most downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P. The conveyance roller 167 guides the substrate P discharged from the position adjustment unit 160 to the recovery roll FR2. The edge position controller EPC2 is connected to the higher-level control device 5, and is received by the higher-level control device 5 based on the detection result of the third substrate detection unit 165.

第3基板檢測部165,檢測從邊緣位置控制器EPC2回收至回 收用捲筒FR2之基板P於寬度方向之位置。第3基板檢測部165固定在第2升降機構162上。因此,第3基板檢測部165與回收用捲筒FR2為相同振動模式。第3基板檢測部165檢測背回收至回收用捲筒FR2之基板P端部之邊緣之位置。第3基板檢測部165將檢測結果輸出至其所連接之上位控制裝置5。 The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the return from the edge position controller EPC2. The position of the substrate P of the take-up reel FR2 in the width direction. The third substrate detection unit 165 is fixed to the second lifting mechanism 162. Therefore, the third substrate detection unit 165 and the recovery roll FR2 have the same vibration mode. The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position where the back is recovered to the edge of the end portion of the substrate P of the reel FR2 for recovery. The third substrate detection unit 165 outputs the detection result to the connected higher-level control device 5.

上位控制裝置5,根據第3基板檢測部165之檢測結果控制邊緣位置控制器EPC2。具體而言,上位控制裝置5,係算出以第3基板檢測部165檢測之被回收至回收用捲筒FR2之基板P端部之邊緣之位置、與預先規定之第3目標位置的差。接著,上位控制裝置5為使該差分為0而對邊緣位置控制器EPC2進行回饋控制,使基板P移動於寬度方向,將相對回收用捲筒FR2之基板P於寬度方向之位置設定為第3目標位置。因此,邊緣位置控制器EPC2可將相對回收用捲筒FR2之基板P於寬度方向之位置維持於第3目標位置。從而,由於能將相對回收用捲筒FR2之基板P於寬度方向之位置維持一定,因此能使在回收用捲筒FR2之軸方向之端面對齊。又,此場合,作為回饋控制,亦可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等之任一種控制。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC2 based on the detection result of the third substrate detection unit 165. Specifically, the higher-level control device 5 calculates the difference between the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P that has been recovered by the third substrate detection unit 165 and recovered to the recovery roll FR2 and the predetermined third target position. Next, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the edge position controller EPC2 so that the difference is zero, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and sets the position of the substrate P in the width direction relative to the reel FR2 to the third position. target location. Therefore, the edge position controller EPC2 can maintain the position of the substrate P relative to the reel FR2 in the width direction at the third target position. Therefore, since the position of the substrate P relative to the recycling roll FR2 in the width direction can be maintained constant, the end faces in the axial direction of the recycling roll FR2 can be aligned. In this case, the feedback control may be any of P control, PI control, and PID control.

第2軸承部161將回收用捲筒FR2軸支成可旋轉。軸支於第2軸承部161之回收用捲筒FR2,當回收基板P時,回收用捲筒FR2之巻徑會隨著回收基板P之分而越大。因此,於回收用捲筒FR2,回收基板P之位置會隨著基板P之回收量而變化。 The second bearing portion 161 rotatably supports the recovery roll FR2. When the recovery roll FR2, which is supported on the second bearing portion 161, is used to recover the substrate P, the diameter of the recovery roll FR2 increases with the amount of the recovery substrate P. Therefore, the position of the substrate P to be recovered in the recovery roll FR2 changes with the amount of the substrate P to be recovered.

第2升降機構162設在設置面E與第2軸承部161之間。第2升降機構162係使第2軸承部161與回收用捲筒FR2一起往Z方向(鉛直方向)移動。第2升降機構162連接於上位控制裝置5,上位控制裝置5可藉由以第2升降機構162使第2軸承部161往Z方向移動,將以回收用捲筒FR2回收基板P之位 置設定在既定位置。 The second lifting mechanism 162 is provided between the installation surface E and the second bearing portion 161. The second lifting mechanism 162 moves the second bearing portion 161 in the Z direction (vertical direction) together with the recovery roll FR2. The second lifting mechanism 162 is connected to the higher-level control device 5. The higher-level control device 5 can move the second bearing portion 161 in the Z direction by the second lifting mechanism 162, and the position of the substrate P will be recovered by the recovery roll FR2. Set to the predetermined position.

排出角度檢測部164係檢測從邊緣位置控制器EPC2之搬送輥167排出之基板P之排出角度θ 2。排出角度檢測部164設在搬送輥167周圍。此處,排出角度θ 2,係於XZ面內,通過搬送輥167之中心軸延伸於鉛直方向之直線與搬送輥167下游側之基板P所夾角度。排出角度檢測部164將檢測結果輸出至所連接之上位控制裝置5。 The ejection angle detection unit 164 detects the ejection angle θ 2 of the substrate P ejected from the conveyance roller 167 of the edge position controller EPC2. The discharge angle detection unit 164 is provided around the conveyance roller 167. Here, the discharge angle θ 2 is in the XZ plane, and the angle between the straight line extending in the vertical direction by the central axis of the transfer roller 167 and the substrate P on the downstream side of the transfer roller 167. The discharge angle detection unit 164 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

上位控制裝置5,根據排出角度檢測部164之檢測結果控制第2升降機構162。具體而言,上位控制裝置5控制第2升降機構162以使排出角度θ 2成為預先規定之目標排出角度。也就是說,當基板P被回收至回收用捲筒FR2之回收量越多、回收用捲筒FR2之巻徑越大,相對於目標排出角度之排出角度θ 2即越小。因此,上位控制裝置5藉由使第2升降機構162往Z方向之上方側移動(上升),使排出角度θ 2變大,修正排出角度θ 2使之成為目標排出角度。如以上所述,上位控制裝置5根據排出角度檢測部164之檢測結果對第2升降機構162進行回饋控制,以使排出角度θ 2成為目標排出角度。從而,由於基板回收裝置4能恆以目標排出角度從搬送輥167排出基板P,因此能降低因排出角度θ 2之變化對基板P造成的影響。又,在此場合下,作為回饋控制,亦可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等中之任一種控制。 The higher-level control device 5 controls the second lifting mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164. Specifically, the higher-level control device 5 controls the second lifting mechanism 162 so that the discharge angle θ 2 becomes a predetermined target discharge angle. That is, when the substrate P is recovered to the recovery roll FR2, the larger the diameter of the recovery roll FR2, the smaller the discharge angle θ2 with respect to the target discharge angle. Therefore, the upper control device 5 moves (raises) the second lifting mechanism 162 to the upper side in the Z direction to increase the discharge angle θ 2 and corrects the discharge angle θ 2 to the target discharge angle. As described above, the higher-level control device 5 performs feedback control on the second lifting mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164 so that the discharge angle θ 2 becomes the target discharge angle. Therefore, since the substrate recovery device 4 can constantly discharge the substrate P from the conveyance roller 167 at the target discharge angle, it is possible to reduce the influence on the substrate P caused by the change in the discharge angle θ 2. In this case, the feedback control may be any of P control, PI control, and PID control.

<元件製造方法> <Element Manufacturing Method>

其次,參照圖8說明元件製造方法。圖8係顯示第1實施形態之元件製造方法的流程圖。 Next, a device manufacturing method will be described with reference to FIG. 8. Fig. 8 is a flowchart showing a device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.

圖8所示之元件製造方法,首先,係進行例如使用有機EL等自發光元件形成之顯示面板之功能、性能設計,以CAD等設計所需之電路 圖案及配線圖案(步驟S201)。接著,根據以CAD等設計之各種的每一層圖案,製作所需層量之光罩M(步驟S202)。並準備捲繞有作為顯示面板之基材之可撓性基板P(樹脂薄膜、金屬箔膜、塑膠等)的供應用捲筒FR1(步驟S203)。又,於此步驟S203中準備之捲筒狀基板P,可以是視需要將其表面改質者、或事前已形成底層(例如透過印記(imprint)方式之微小凹凸)者、或預先積層有光感應性之功能膜或透明膜(絶緣材料)者。 The element manufacturing method shown in FIG. 8 is to first design the function and performance of a display panel formed using, for example, an organic EL and other self-luminous elements, and design a circuit required by CAD or the like. Pattern and wiring pattern (step S201). Next, a mask M of a desired layer amount is produced based on various patterns of each layer designed by CAD or the like (step S202). A supply roll FR1 on which a flexible substrate P (resin film, metal foil film, plastic, etc.) as a base material of the display panel is wound is prepared (step S203). In addition, the roll-shaped substrate P prepared in this step S203 may be one whose surface has been modified as necessary, or which has been previously formed with a bottom layer (for example, through minute irregularities of an imprint method), or laminated with light in advance. Inductive functional film or transparent film (insulating material).

接著,於基板P上形成構成顯示面板元件之電極或以配線、絶緣膜、TFT(薄膜半導體)等構成之底板層,並以積層於該底板之方式形成以有機EL等自發光元件構成之發光層(顯示像素部)(步驟S204)。於此步驟S204中,雖包含使用先前各實施形態所說明之曝光裝置U3使光阻層曝光之習知微影製程,但亦包含使取代光阻而塗有感光性矽烷耦合劑之基板P圖案曝光來於表面形成親撥水性之圖案的曝光製程、使光感應性觸媒層圖案曝光並以無電解鍍敷法形成金屬膜圖案(配線、電極等)的濕式製程、或以含有銀奈米粒子之導電性墨水、含有隔絕材料之墨水、或者含有半導體材料(稠五苯、半導體奈米棒等)之墨水等描繪圖案的印刷製程等之處理。 Next, an electrode constituting a display panel element or a substrate layer composed of wiring, an insulating film, a TFT (thin film semiconductor), and the like is formed on the substrate P, and a light emission composed of a self-emitting element such as an organic EL is laminated on the substrate. Layer (display pixel portion) (step S204). In this step S204, although the conventional lithography process is used to expose the photoresist layer using the exposure device U3 described in the previous embodiments, it also includes a substrate P pattern coated with a photosensitive silane coupling agent instead of the photoresist. Exposure comes from an exposure process that forms a water-repellent pattern on the surface, a wet process that exposes a photo-sensitive catalyst layer pattern and forms a metal film pattern (wiring, electrodes, etc.) by an electroless plating method, or a silver-containing process Conductive printing process for drawing patterns such as conductive ink of rice particles, ink containing insulating materials, or ink containing semiconductor materials (thick pentabenzene, semiconductor nanorods, etc.).

接著,針對以捲筒方式於長條基板P上連續製造之每一顯示面板元件切割基板P、或於各顯示面板元件表面貼合保護膜(耐環境障壁層)或彩色濾光片膜等,組裝元件(步驟S205)。接著,進行顯示面板元件是否可正常作動、或是否滿足所欲性能及特性之檢查步驟(步驟S206)。經由以上方式,即能製造顯示面板(可撓性顯示器)。 Next, for each display panel element that is continuously manufactured on the long substrate P by a roll method, the substrate P is cut, or a protective film (environmental barrier layer) or a color filter film is laminated on the surface of each display panel element. The components are assembled (step S205). Next, a step of checking whether the display panel element can operate normally or whether it satisfies the desired performance and characteristics is performed (step S206). Through the above method, a display panel (flexible display) can be manufactured.

以上,第1實施形態,可於設置面E透過除振台131設置曝光 單元121,並將曝光單元121、位置調整單元120及驅動單元122分別以獨立狀態設置。也就是說,第1實施形態,可藉由除振台131將曝光單元121、位置調整單元120及驅動單元122加以隔離,亦即作成不同的振動模式。因此,曝光單元121可藉由除振台131降低來自位置調整單元120及驅動單元122之振動。 As described above, in the first embodiment, the exposure can be set through the vibration isolator 131 on the installation surface E. The unit 121 sets the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the driving unit 122 in independent states. That is, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the driving unit 122 can be isolated by the vibration isolation table 131, that is, different vibration modes can be created. Therefore, the exposure unit 121 can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131.

又,第1實施形態,可將相對固定輥126之基板P於寬度方向之位置維持於第1目標位置。從而,由於基板P能對固定輥126供應至同一位置,因此能將從固定輥126供應之基板P於寬度方向之位置維持一定。如此,第1實施形態中,由於從固定輥126送出之基板P於寬度方向之位置能維持一定,因此能降低基板P在寬度方向之位置變動對基板P造成之振動等的影響。 In the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be maintained at the first target position. Therefore, since the substrate P can be supplied to the same position to the fixed roller 126, the position of the substrate P supplied from the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be maintained constant. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the position of the substrate P sent from the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be maintained constant, it is possible to reduce the influence of the position variation of the substrate P in the width direction on the vibration and the like of the substrate P.

又,第1實施形態,可將基板P相對搬送輥127之位置維持於第2目標位置。因此,第1實施形態,能使供應至曝光單元121之基板P之位置維持一定。據此,第1實施形態中,由於能使供應至搬送輥127之基板P之位置一定,因此能降低基板P之位置變動對基板P造成之振動等的影響。 In the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P with respect to the conveyance roller 127 can be maintained at the second target position. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 can be maintained constant. Accordingly, in the first embodiment, since the position of the substrate P supplied to the transfer roller 127 can be made constant, it is possible to reduce the influence of the variation in the position of the substrate P on the vibration and the like of the substrate P.

又,第1實施形態中,可藉由以按壓機構130對基板P進行按壓,據以降低從位置調整單元120供應至曝光單元121之基板P之振動。 In the first embodiment, the substrate P can be pressed by the pressing mechanism 130 to reduce the vibration of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121.

又,第1實施形態,可將裝置框架132分離為第1框架132a與第2框架132b,於第1框架132a支承光罩載台21、於第2框架132b支承旋轉筒25。因此,可將第1框架132a與第2框架132b分別以獨立狀態設置。也就是說,可使第1框架132a與第2框架132b隔離、亦即作成不同的振動模式。因此,能降低第1框架132a及第2框架132b彼此間振動的傳遞。 In the first embodiment, the device frame 132 can be separated into a first frame 132a and a second frame 132b, the photomask stage 21 can be supported on the first frame 132a, and the rotary tube 25 can be supported on the second frame 132b. Therefore, the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be provided in separate states, respectively. That is, the first frame 132a can be isolated from the second frame 132b, that is, different vibration modes can be created. Therefore, transmission of vibration between the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be reduced.

又,第1實施形態中,可將從供應用捲筒FR1供應至曝光裝置U3之位置調整單元120之搬送輥127之基板P相對搬送輥127之進入角度θ 1維持一定。因此,能將低因進入角度θ 1之變位對基板P之影響。 In the first embodiment, the substrate P of the transfer roller 127 that can be supplied from the supply roll FR1 to the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure apparatus U3 can be maintained at a constant angle θ 1 with respect to the transfer roller 127. Therefore, it is possible to influence the displacement of the low factor entry angle θ 1 on the substrate P.

又,第1實施形態中,可將從基板回收裝置4之位置調整單元160之搬送輥167供應至回收用捲筒FR2之基板P相對搬送輥167之排出角度θ 2維持一定。因此,能降低因排出角度θ 2之變位對基板P之影響(基板P對回收用捲筒FR2之捲繞不均等)。 Moreover, in the first embodiment, the discharge angle θ 2 of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 160 of the substrate recovery device 4 to the recovery roll FR2 with respect to the transfer roller 167 can be maintained constant. Therefore, the influence of the displacement of the discharge angle θ 2 on the substrate P (the uneven winding of the substrate P to the recovery roll FR2) can be reduced.

〔第2實施形態〕 [Second Embodiment]

其次,參照圖9說明第2實施形態之曝光裝置U3。又,第2實施形態之說明中,為避免重複記載,僅對與第1實施形態不同之部分進行說明,而針對與第1實施形態相同之構成要素則係賦予與第1實施形態相同之符號加以說明。圖9係顯示第2實施形態之曝光裝置(基板處理裝置)U3之部分構成的圖。第1實施形態之曝光裝置U3之曝光單元121中,裝置框架132係分離為第1框架132a與第2框架132b,而第2實施形態之曝光裝置U3之曝光單元121a則為一單體的裝置框架180。 Next, an exposure apparatus U3 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9. In addition, in the description of the second embodiment, in order to avoid duplication, only the parts different from the first embodiment will be described, and the same components as those in the first embodiment will be given the same symbols as in the first embodiment. Explain. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 of the second embodiment. In the exposure unit 121 of the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment, the device frame 132 is separated into a first frame 132a and a second frame 132b, and the exposure unit 121a of the exposure device U3 of the second embodiment is a single device. Frame 180.

第2實施形態之曝光單元121a中,裝置框架180設在除振台131上,支承保持穿透型圓筒光罩MA之光罩保持機構11、基板支承機構12、照明機構13及投影光學系PL。裝置框架180,係由設在除振台131上之下面部181、立設在下面部181上之一對軸承部182、支承在一對軸承部182上之中間部183、立設於中間部183上之脚部184、被脚部184支承之上面部185、與立設於上面部185之臂部186構成。 In the exposure unit 121a of the second embodiment, the device frame 180 is provided on the vibration isolator 131, and supports and holds the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system of the transmission-type cylindrical mask MA. PL. The device frame 180 is composed of a lower surface portion 181 provided on the vibration isolation table 131, a pair of bearing portions 182 standing on the lower surface portion 181, a middle portion 183 supported on the pair of bearing portions 182, and a standing portion. A leg portion 184 on the upper portion 183, an upper portion 185 supported by the leg portion 184, and an arm portion 186 standing on the upper portion 185 are formed.

於一對軸承部182,分別設有軸支基板支承機構12之旋轉筒 25之旋轉軸AX2的空氣軸承141。各空氣軸承141將旋轉軸AX2以非接觸狀態軸支成旋轉自如。於中間部183,透過保持構件143設置投影光學系PL。於保持構件143與中間部183之間的3處,設有墊圈構件145。保持構件143,藉由3處墊圈構件145,於中間部183上被動態支承。於上面部185設有支承光罩保持機構11(中空圓筒體)、並用以驅動圓筒光罩MA繞旋轉中心線AX1旋轉之驅動輥(絞盤輥)94。照明機構13配置在光罩保持機構11內部,以圖6中之左圖所示之排列從內側照明圓筒光罩MA上之照明區域IR(IR1~IR6)。 The pair of bearing portions 182 are provided with rotating cylinders of the shaft-supporting substrate supporting mechanism 12, respectively. The air bearing 141 of the rotating shaft AX2 of 25. Each air bearing 141 pivotally supports the rotation shaft AX2 in a non-contact state so as to be rotatable. A projection optical system PL is provided on the intermediate portion 183 through the holding member 143. A washer member 145 is provided at three positions between the holding member 143 and the intermediate portion 183. The holding member 143 is dynamically supported on the intermediate portion 183 by three washer members 145. The upper surface portion 185 is provided with a driving roller (capstan roller) 94 that supports the mask holding mechanism 11 (hollow cylindrical body) and drives the cylindrical mask MA to rotate about the rotation center line AX1. The illumination mechanism 13 is arranged inside the mask holding mechanism 11 and illuminates the illumination areas IR (IR1 to IR6) on the cylindrical mask MA from the inside in an arrangement shown in the left diagram in FIG. 6.

進一步的,於上面部185設有用以將驅動輥94之旋轉軸軸支成可旋轉的軸承187,驅動驅動輥94旋轉之光罩側驅動部22,與先前圖4所示之基板側驅動部26同樣構成。雖未圖示,但在圓筒體狀之光罩保持機構11之旋轉中心線AX1方向之兩端部,設有與先前之圖4同樣的編碼器測量用之標尺(繞射光柵)或標尺板25c,藉由以和此等對向配置之讀取頭EH,精密測量圓筒光罩MA之周方向位置。 Further, the upper surface portion 185 is provided with a bearing 187 for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft of the driving roller 94, a mask-side driving portion 22 that drives the driving roller 94 to rotate, and the substrate-side driving portion shown in FIG. 4 previously. 26 is also constructed. Although not shown, a scale (diffraction grating) or a scale for measuring encoders is provided at both ends of the cylindrical mask holding mechanism 11 in the direction of the rotation center line AX1. The plate 25c accurately measures the position of the cylindrical mask MA in the circumferential direction by using the read heads EH arranged so as to face each other.

以上,第2實施形態中,可以單體之裝置框架180支承光罩保持機構11、基板支承機構12、照明機構13及投影光學系PL。因此,第2實施形態中,由於能固定光罩保持機構11、基板支承機構12、照明機構13及投影光學系PL之位置關係,因此能在無需大幅調整此等之位置關係的情形下,容易的加以設置。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the single device frame 180 can support the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL. Therefore, in the second embodiment, since the positional relationship between the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be fixed, it is easy to easily adjust the positional relationship without having to significantly adjust the positional relationship. Set it.

其次,參照圖10,進一步詳細說明圖9所示之第2實施形態之曝光裝置U3(曝光單元121a)。圖10之曝光單元121a中,光罩保持機構11具備將穿透型光罩MA保持成圓筒狀之光罩保持圓筒21a、支承光罩保持圓筒21a之引導輥93、驅動光罩保持圓筒21a繞中心線AX1旋轉之驅動輥94、以及 光罩側驅動部22。 Next, the exposure apparatus U3 (exposure unit 121a) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 9 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In the exposure unit 121a of FIG. 10, the mask holding mechanism 11 includes a mask holding cylinder 21a that holds the transmission mask MA in a cylindrical shape, a guide roller 93 that supports the mask holding cylinder 21a, and a driving mask holding A driving roller 94 for rotating the cylinder 21a around the center line AX1, and Photomask-side driving section 22.

光罩保持圓筒21a,形成光罩MA上之照明區域IR配置之光罩面P1。本實施形態中,光罩面P1,包含將線分(母線)繞與此線分平行之軸(圓筒形狀之中心軸)周圍旋轉之面(以下,稱圓筒面)。圓筒面,係例如圓筒之外周面、圓柱之外周面等。光罩保持圓筒21a係以例如玻璃或石英等構成,為一具有一定厚度之圓筒狀,其外周面(圓筒面)形成光罩面P1。亦即,本實施形態中,光罩MA上之照明區域IR係彎曲成從第1軸AX1具有一定半徑Rm之圓筒面狀。光罩保持圓筒21a中,從光罩保持圓筒21a之徑方向看與光罩MA之光罩圖案重疊之部分、例如光罩保持圓筒21a之Y方向兩端側以外之中央部分,對照明光束EL1具有透光性。 The mask holding cylinder 21a forms a mask surface P1 arranged in the illumination area IR on the mask MA. In this embodiment, the mask surface P1 includes a surface (hereinafter, referred to as a cylindrical surface) that rotates a line component (general line) around an axis (center axis of a cylindrical shape) parallel to the line component. The cylindrical surface is, for example, a cylindrical outer peripheral surface or a cylindrical outer peripheral surface. The mask holding cylinder 21a is made of, for example, glass, quartz, or the like, and has a cylindrical shape having a certain thickness. The outer peripheral surface (cylindrical surface) forms a mask surface P1. That is, in this embodiment, the illumination area IR on the mask MA is curved into a cylindrical surface shape having a constant radius Rm from the first axis AX1. The portion of the mask holding cylinder 21a that overlaps with the mask pattern of the mask MA as viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding cylinder 21a, for example, the center portion other than both ends in the Y direction of the mask holding cylinder 21a. The illumination beam EL1 is translucent.

光罩MA,係製作成在例如平坦性佳之短片狀極薄玻璃板(例如厚度為100~500μm)之一面以鉻等遮光層形成圖案之穿透型平面狀片狀光罩,使其順著光罩保持圓筒21a之外周面彎曲,在捲於(貼於)此外周面之狀態下使用。光罩MA具有未形成有圖案之圖案非形成區域A4,於圖案非形成區域A4安裝於光罩保持圓筒21a。光罩MA相對光罩保持圓筒21a可釋放。光罩MA,亦可取代捲繞於以透明圓筒母材製作之光罩保持圓筒21a,而在以透明圓筒母材製作之光罩保持圓筒21a之外周面直接描繪形成以鉻等遮光層形成之光罩圖案予以一體化。此場合,光罩保持圓筒21a之功能亦係作為光罩MA之支承構件。 The photomask MA is a transmissive planar sheet photomask that is patterned with a light-shielding layer such as chromium on one side of, for example, a short sheet-shaped ultra-thin glass plate with a good flatness (for example, a thickness of 100 to 500 μm). The outer peripheral surface of the photomask holding cylinder 21a is curved, and is used while being wound (attached) to the outer peripheral surface. The photomask MA has a pattern non-formation area A4 in which a pattern is not formed, and is attached to the photomask holding cylinder 21a in the pattern non-formation area A4. The mask MA is releasable with respect to the mask holding cylinder 21a. The reticle MA may be wound around the reticle holding cylinder 21a made of a transparent cylindrical base material, and the perimeter of the reticle holding cylinder 21a made of the transparent cylindrical base material may be directly drawn to form chrome or the like. The mask pattern formed by the light-shielding layer is integrated. In this case, the function of the mask holding cylinder 21a also serves as a support member for the mask MA.

引導輥93及驅動輥94,相對光罩保持圓筒21a之中心軸延伸於平行之Y方向。引導輥93及驅動輥94係設置成能繞與中心軸平行之軸旋轉。引導輥93及驅動輥94,分別為軸方向端部之外徑較其他部分之外形大,此 端部外接於光罩保持圓筒21a。如以上所述,引導輥93及驅動輥94係以避免與光罩保持圓筒21a所保持之光罩MA接觸之方式設置。驅動輥94與光罩側驅動部22連接。驅動輥94藉由將來自光罩側驅動部22之動力傳遞至光罩保持圓筒21a,據以使光罩保持圓筒21a繞中心軸AX1旋轉。 The guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 extend in a parallel Y direction with respect to the central axis of the mask holding cylinder 21a. The guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are provided so as to be rotatable about an axis parallel to the central axis. The outer diameter of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 in the axial direction is larger than that of the other portions. The end is externally connected to the mask holding cylinder 21a. As described above, the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 are provided in a manner to avoid contact with the mask MA held by the mask holding cylinder 21a. The driving roller 94 is connected to the mask-side driving portion 22. The driving roller 94 transmits the power from the mask-side driving portion 22 to the mask holding cylinder 21a, thereby rotating the mask holding cylinder 21a about the central axis AX1.

又,光罩保持機構11雖是具備1個引導輥93,但數量並無限定,可以是2個以上。同樣的,光罩保持機構11雖是具備1個驅動輥94,但數量並無限定,可以是2個以上。引導輥93與驅動輥94中之至少1個,可以是配置在光罩保持圓筒21a之內側,與光罩保持圓筒21a內接。此外,光罩保持圓筒21a中,從光罩保持圓筒21a之徑方向看與光罩MA之光罩圖案不重疊之部分(Y方向兩端側),可具有對照明光束EL1之透光性、亦可不具有透光性。又,引導輥93及驅動輥94中之一方或双方,可以是例如圓錐梯形,其中心軸(旋轉軸)相對中心軸AX1非平行。 The mask holding mechanism 11 is provided with one guide roller 93, but the number is not limited, and may be two or more. Similarly, although the mask holding mechanism 11 is provided with one driving roller 94, the number is not limited, and may be two or more. At least one of the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 may be disposed inside the mask holding cylinder 21a and inwardly connected to the mask holding cylinder 21a. In addition, in the mask holding cylinder 21a, when viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding cylinder 21a, portions that do not overlap with the mask pattern of the mask MA (both ends in the Y direction) may have light transmission to the illumination beam EL1. It may or may not have translucency. One or both of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 may be, for example, a conical trapezoid, and a central axis (rotation axis) thereof is not parallel to the central axis AX1.

照明機構13與第1實施形態同樣構成,照明機構13之複數個照明模組ILa1~ILa6配置在光罩保持圓筒21a之內側。複數個照明模組ILa1~ILa6之各個,引導從光源射出之照明光束EL1,將被引導之照明光束EL1從光罩保持圓筒21a之內部照射於光罩MA。照明機構13,將被保持於光罩保持機構11之光罩MA之照明區域IR,以照明光束EL1以均一之亮度加以照明。又,光源可配置在光罩保持圓筒21a之內側、亦可以是配置在光罩保持圓筒21a之外側。此外,光源可以是與曝光裝置U3不同之另一裝置(外部裝置)。 The lighting mechanism 13 has the same configuration as the first embodiment, and a plurality of lighting modules ILa1 to ILa6 of the lighting mechanism 13 are arranged inside the mask holding cylinder 21a. Each of the plurality of illumination modules ILa1 to ILa6 guides the illumination beam EL1 emitted from the light source, and irradiates the guided illumination beam EL1 from the inside of the mask holding cylinder 21a to the mask MA. The illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination region IR of the mask MA held by the mask holding mechanism 11 with the illumination light beam EL1 at a uniform brightness. The light source may be arranged inside the mask holding cylinder 21a, or may be arranged outside the mask holding cylinder 21a. Further, the light source may be another device (external device) different from the exposure device U3.

如以上所述,第2實施形態,即使曝光單元121a之光罩MA係圓筒狀穿透型之光罩,亦能將曝光單元121a與位置調整單元120及驅動單元 122分別以獨立狀態(隔絕振動傳遞之狀態)設置。因此,曝光單元121a可藉由除振台131降低來自位置調整單元120及驅動單元122之振動,獲得與上述第1實施形態相同的效果。 As described above, in the second embodiment, even if the mask MA of the exposure unit 121a is a cylindrical transmission type mask, the exposure unit 121a, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit can be used. 122 are set in independent states (states to isolate vibration transmission). Therefore, the exposure unit 121a can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and obtain the same effect as the first embodiment described above.

〔第3實施形態〕 [Third Embodiment]

其次,參照圖11說明第3實施形態之曝光裝置U3。又,第3實施形態之說明中,為避免重複之記載,僅說明與第1實施形態及第2實施形態不同之部分,針對與第1實施形態及第2實施形態相同之構成要素,則賦予與第1或第2實施形態相同符號加以說明。圖11中顯示第3實施形態之曝光單元121b之整體構成,係使用圓筒狀之反射型光罩MB、並將基板P支承為平面狀之構成。 Next, an exposure apparatus U3 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11. In addition, in the description of the third embodiment, in order to avoid repetitive descriptions, only parts different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described, and the same constituent elements as those of the first and second embodiments will be given. The same symbols as those in the first or second embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 shows the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121b according to the third embodiment, which is configured by using a cylindrical reflective mask MB and supporting the substrate P in a flat shape.

首先,說明用於第3實施形態之曝光裝置U3之光罩MB。光罩MB係例如使用金屬製圓筒體之反射型光罩。光罩MB,係成為一具有以延伸於Y方向之第1軸AX1為中心之曲率半徑為Rm之外周面(圓周面)的圓筒體,於徑方向具有一定厚度。光罩MB之圓周面係形成有既定光罩圖案之光罩面P1。光罩面P1包含於既定方向以高效率反射光束之高反射部、與於既定方向不反射或以低效率反射光束之反射抑制部,光罩圖案係以高反射部及反射抑制部形成。此種光罩MB,由於是金屬製圓筒體,因此能便宜的作成。 First, the mask MB used in the exposure apparatus U3 of the third embodiment will be described. The photomask MB is, for example, a reflective photomask using a metal cylindrical body. The photomask MB is a cylindrical body having a peripheral surface (peripheral surface) having a radius of curvature Rm centered on the first axis AX1 extending in the Y direction, and has a certain thickness in the radial direction. The circumferential surface of the mask MB is a mask surface P1 on which a predetermined mask pattern is formed. The mask surface P1 includes a high reflection portion that reflects a light beam with a high efficiency in a predetermined direction and a reflection suppression portion that does not reflect a light beam in a predetermined direction or reflects a light beam with a low efficiency. The mask pattern is formed of a high reflection portion and a reflection suppression portion. Since the photomask MB is a metal cylindrical body, it can be manufactured inexpensively.

又,光罩MB只要具有以第1軸AX1為中心之曲率半徑為Rm的圓周面即可,不限定於圓筒體之形狀。例如,光罩MB可以是具有圓周面之圓弧狀板材。此外,光罩MB可以是薄板狀,使薄板狀之光罩MB彎曲以具有圓周面。 The photomask MB is only required to have a circumferential surface with a radius of curvature Rm centered on the first axis AX1, and is not limited to the shape of a cylindrical body. For example, the mask MB may be an arc-shaped plate material having a circumferential surface. In addition, the mask MB may have a thin plate shape, and the thin plate-shaped mask MB is bent to have a circumferential surface.

光罩保持機構11具有保持光罩MB之光罩保持圓筒21b。光罩保持圓筒21b,以光罩M之第1軸AX1為旋轉中心之方式保持光罩MB。光罩側驅動部22連接於下位控制裝置16,以第1軸AX1為旋轉中心使光罩保持圓筒21b旋轉。 The mask holding mechanism 11 includes a mask holding cylinder 21b that holds the mask MB. The mask holding cylinder 21b holds the mask MB with the first axis AX1 of the mask M as a rotation center. The mask-side driving unit 22 is connected to the lower-level control device 16 and rotates the mask holding cylinder 21 b with the first axis AX1 as a rotation center.

又,光罩保持機構11雖係以光罩保持圓筒21b保持圓筒體之光罩M,但不限於此構成。光罩保持機構11,可以順著光罩保持圓筒21b之外周面捲繞薄板狀之光罩MB來加以保持。,此外,光罩保持機構11,亦可將圓弧狀板材之光罩MB於光罩保持圓筒21b之外周面加以保持。 The mask holding mechanism 11 is not limited to this configuration, although the mask M holds the cylindrical body by the mask holding cylinder 21b. The mask holding mechanism 11 can be held by winding a thin-plate-shaped mask MB along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding cylinder 21b. In addition, the mask holding mechanism 11 may hold the mask MB of the arc-shaped plate material on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding cylinder 21b.

基板支承機構12,具有張掛基板P之一對驅動輥196、將基板P支承為平面狀之空氣載台197、以及複數個引導輥28。一對驅動輥196係藉由基板側驅動部26而旋轉,使基板P移動於掃描方向。空氣載台197設在一對驅動輥196之間,設在以一定張力裝掛在一對驅動輥196之間之基板P的背面側,以非接觸狀態或低摩擦狀態將基板P支承為平面狀。複數個引導輥28,夾著一對驅動輥196分別設在基板P之搬送方向上游側及下游側。例如係設置4個引導輥28,於搬送方向之上游側、搬送方向之下游側分別配置2個。 The substrate supporting mechanism 12 includes a pair of driving rollers 196 that suspend a substrate P, an air stage 197 that supports the substrate P in a flat shape, and a plurality of guide rollers 28. The pair of driving rollers 196 are rotated by the substrate-side driving portion 26 to move the substrate P in the scanning direction. The air stage 197 is provided between the pair of driving rollers 196 and on the back side of the substrate P mounted between the pair of driving rollers 196 with a certain tension, and supports the substrate P in a non-contact state or a low friction state as a flat surface shape. The plurality of guide rollers 28 are provided on the upstream side and the downstream side of the substrate P in the conveying direction with a pair of driving rollers 196 therebetween. For example, four guide rollers 28 are provided, and two are arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side in the conveying direction, respectively.

因此,基板支承機構12,將從位置調整單元120搬送而來之基板P以2個引導輥28引導至一方之驅動輥196。被引導至一方之驅動輥196之基板P,被引導至另一方之驅動輥196,據以以一定張力張掛在一對驅動輥196。基板支承機構12,以基板側驅動部26使一對驅動輥196旋轉,據以將張掛在一對驅動輥196之基板P,一邊以空氣載台197加以支承、一邊搬送向引導輥28。基板支承機構12將被搬送至引導輥28之基板P引導向基板回收裝置4。 Therefore, the substrate supporting mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120 to one driving roller 196 with two guide rollers 28. The substrate P guided to one of the driving rollers 196 is guided to the other driving roller 196 and is hung on the pair of driving rollers 196 with a certain tension. The substrate supporting mechanism 12 rotates the pair of driving rollers 196 by the substrate-side driving portion 26, and thereby the substrate P suspended on the pair of driving rollers 196 is conveyed to the guide roller 28 while being supported by the air stage 197. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transferred to the guide roller 28 to the substrate recovery device 4.

照明機構13,在使用圓筒狀之反射型光罩MB之情形時,從光罩保持圓筒21b之外周側照明照明光束EL1。也就是說,照明機構13,其光源裝置及照明光學系IL係設置在光罩保持圓筒21b之外周。照明光學系IL係使用偏光分束器PBS之落射照明系。在照明光學系IL之各照明模組IL1~IL6與光罩MB之間,設有偏光分束器PBS與1/4波長板198。也就是說,從來自光源裝置之照明光束EL1之入射側起,依序設有照明模組IL1~IL6、偏光分束器PBS、與1/4波長板198。 In the case of using the cylindrical reflection mask MB, the illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination light beam EL1 from the outer peripheral side of the mask holding cylinder 21b. In other words, the lighting mechanism 13 has a light source device and an illumination optical system IL system provided on the outer periphery of the mask holding cylinder 21b. The illumination optical system IL is an epi-illumination system using a polarizing beam splitter PBS. A polarizing beam splitter PBS and a quarter-wavelength plate 198 are provided between each of the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 of the illumination optical system IL and the mask MB. That is, from the incident side of the illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device, the illumination modules IL1 to IL6, the polarizing beam splitter PBS, and the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 are sequentially provided.

此處,從光源裝置射出之照明光束EL1,通過照明模組IL1~IL6射入偏光分束器PBS。射入偏光分束器PBS之照明光束EL1在被偏光分束器PBS反射後,通過1/4波長板198照明於照明區域IR。從照明區域IR反射之投影光束EL2,藉由再次通過1/4波長板198,被轉換成於偏光分束器PBS穿透之光束。通過1/4波長板198之投影光束EL2,通過偏光分束器PBS射入投影光學系PL。 Here, the illumination beam EL1 emitted from the light source device is incident on the polarizing beam splitter PBS through the illumination modules IL1 to IL6. The illumination beam EL1 incident on the polarizing beam splitter PBS is reflected by the polarizing beam splitter PBS, and then illuminates the illumination area IR through the 1/4 wavelength plate 198. The projection light beam EL2 reflected from the illumination area IR passes through the quarter-wave plate 198 again, and is converted into a light beam transmitted through the polarizing beam splitter PBS. The projection light beam EL2 passing through the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 is incident on the projection optical system PL through the polarizing beam splitter PBS.

以上,第3實施形態中,曝光單元121b之光罩MB為圓筒狀之反射型光罩,在基板P被支承為平面狀之情形時,亦能將曝光單元121b與位置調整單元120及驅動單元122分別以獨立狀態(隔絕振動傳遞之狀態)設置。因此,曝光單元121b,可藉由除振台131降低來自位置調整單元120及驅動單元122之振動,獲得與上述第2實施形態同樣的效果。 As described above, in the third embodiment, the mask MB of the exposure unit 121b is a cylindrical reflective mask, and when the substrate P is supported in a flat shape, the exposure unit 121b and the position adjustment unit 120 can be driven and driven. The units 122 are respectively provided in independent states (states that isolate vibration transmission). Therefore, the exposure unit 121b can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and obtain the same effect as that of the second embodiment described above.

〔第4實施形態〕 [Fourth Embodiment]

其次,說明第4實施形態之曝光裝置(圖案形成裝置)U3。又,第4實施形態之說明中亦為了避免重複之記載,僅說明與第1~第3實施形態不同之部分,針對與第1~第3實施形態相同之構成要素則賦予和第1~第3實施形 態相同之符號,並省略其說明。 Next, an exposure apparatus (pattern forming apparatus) U3 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of the fourth embodiment, in order to avoid repetitive descriptions, only the parts different from the first to third embodiments will be described, and the same constituent elements as the first to third embodiments will be given the same as the first to third embodiments. 3 implementation The same symbols are used in the same state, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

圖12係顯示第4實施形態之曝光裝置U3之構成的圖,圖13係從上方(+Z方向)側觀察在圖12所示之曝光裝置U3內搬送之基板P的圖。圖14係從-Y方向側觀察在圖13所示之位置調整單元120a側之最後一個輥126與曝光單元121c側之第一個輥AR1之間搬送之基板P的圖,圖15係從-X方向側觀察以圖12所示之旋轉筒25搬送之基板P的圖。曝光裝置(處理裝置)U3,具備位置調整單元120a、與相對位置調整單元120a設在基板P之搬送方向下游側(+X方向側)之曝光單元121c。位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c是分開設置的。也就是說,位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c係以非接觸之獨立狀態設置,或雖可透過將位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之間之基板P之搬送路及曝光單元121c後之基板P之搬送路加以覆蓋之蛇腹式等防塵套121d彼此接觸,但係以在位置調整單元120a產生之振動成分不會直接傳至曝光單元121c的狀態(抑制振動傳遞之狀態)設置。曝光單元121c透過被動或主動式除振台(除振裝置、防振裝置)131設在設置面(基台面)E上。位置調整單元120a,透過基台200設在設置面E上。據此,來自其他處理裝置U1、U2、U4~Un等之振動及來自位置調整單元120a之振動不會透過設置面E傳遞至曝光單元121c。也就是說,可使曝光單元121c與位置調整單元120a及其他處理裝置U等之間之振動傳遞成為一絕緣(隔絕)狀態。換言之,位置調整單元120a及其他處理裝置U等之振動與曝光單元121c間之振動成為彼此隔絕的狀態。此外,基台200亦可以是具有除振、防振功能之除振台(除振裝置、防振裝置)。 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of the exposure apparatus U3 of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13 is a diagram of the substrate P carried in the exposure apparatus U3 shown in FIG. 12 as viewed from above (+ Z direction). FIG. 14 is a view of the substrate P transferred between the last roller 126 on the position adjustment unit 120a side and the first roller AR1 on the exposure unit 121c side as viewed from the -Y direction side, and FIG. 15 is a view from- A view of the substrate P carried by the rotating drum 25 shown in FIG. 12 when viewed in the X direction side. The exposure device (processing device) U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120a and an exposure unit 121c provided on the downstream side (+ X direction side) of the substrate P in the conveying direction and the relative position adjustment unit 120a. The position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided separately. That is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided in a non-contact independent state, or though the substrate P transport path between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c and the substrate P after the exposure unit 121c can be passed The dustproof cover 121d such as the bellows type which covers the conveying path is in contact with each other, but is provided in a state where vibration components generated in the position adjustment unit 120a are not directly transmitted to the exposure unit 121c (state where vibration transmission is suppressed). The exposure unit 121c is provided on the installation surface (base table surface) E through a passive or active vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) 131. The position adjustment unit 120 a is provided on the installation surface E through the base 200. Accordingly, vibrations from other processing devices U1, U2, U4 to Un, and the like and vibrations from the position adjustment unit 120a are not transmitted to the exposure unit 121c through the setting surface E. That is, the vibration transmission between the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing devices U and the like can be made into an insulated (isolated) state. In other words, the vibration between the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing devices U, and the vibration between the exposure unit 121c are isolated from each other. In addition, the base 200 may be a vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) having vibration isolation and vibration isolation functions.

位置調整單元(位置調整裝置)120a,具備邊緣位置控制器 EPC3a、固定輥(引導輥)126、第1基板檢測部202及下位控制裝置(控制部)204。邊緣位置控制器EPC3a、固定輥126及第1基板檢測部202,係從基板P之搬送方向上游側(-X方向側)以前述順序設置。邊緣位置控制器EPC3a,係調整(修正)基板P於寬度方向之位置,以使在長邊方向伴隨既定張力(例如,20~200N範圍之一定值)搬送之基板P之寬度方向位置成為目標位置。邊緣位置控制器EPC3a可在位置調整單元120a內往基板P之寬度方向(Y方向)移動。邊緣位置控制器EPC3a受致動器206(參照圖13)之驅動而往Y方向移動,調整基板P於寬度方向之位置。邊緣位置控制器EPC3a具有用以將基板P搬送向固定輥126之引導輥Rs1、Rs2及驅動輥NR。引導輥Rs1、Rs2係引導被搬送之基板P,驅動輥NR則係一邊挾持基板P之正反兩面、一邊旋轉以搬送基板P。又,圖13中之參照符號207a,係將引導輥Rs1、Rs2及驅動輥NR支承為可旋轉之支承構件(邊緣位置控制器EPC3a之框架)。又,參照符號207b,係支承第1基板檢測部202、並將固定輥126支承為可旋轉之支承構件(位置調整單元120a之本體框架),於此本體框架207b上將邊緣位置控制器EPC3a之框架207a搭載成可往Y方向移動。 Position adjustment unit (position adjustment device) 120a with edge position controller The EPC 3a, a fixed roller (guide roller) 126, a first substrate detection section 202, and a lower-level control device (control section) 204. The edge position controller EPC3a, the fixed roller 126, and the first substrate detection unit 202 are provided in the aforementioned order from the upstream side (-X direction side) of the substrate P in the conveying direction. The edge position controller EPC3a adjusts (corrects) the position of the substrate P in the width direction so that the width position of the substrate P that is transported with a predetermined tension (for example, a certain value in the range of 20 to 200 N) in the long direction becomes the target position . The edge position controller EPC3a can move toward the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P within the position adjustment unit 120a. The edge position controller EPC3a is driven in the Y direction by the actuator 206 (see FIG. 13), and adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction. The edge position controller EPC3a includes a guide roller Rs1, Rs2, and a driving roller NR for conveying the substrate P to the fixed roller 126. The guide rollers Rs1 and Rs2 guide the substrate P to be conveyed, and the drive roller NR rotates the substrate P while holding the front and back surfaces of the substrate P while rotating. Reference numeral 207a in FIG. 13 is a support member (frame of the edge position controller EPC3a) that supports the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2, and the drive roller NR as rotatable. Reference numeral 207b refers to a supporting member (main frame of the position adjustment unit 120a) that supports the first substrate detection unit 202 and supports the fixed roller 126. The main body frame 207b includes an edge position controller EPC3a. The frame 207a is mounted so as to be movable in the Y direction.

固定輥126,將以邊緣位置控制器EPC3a調整了寬度方向位置之基板P引導向曝光單元121c。藉由此引導輥Rs1、Rs2、驅動輥NR及固定輥126,基板P於長度方向被彎折而引導搬送。第1基板檢測部(基板誤差測量部、變化測量部)202,檢測從固定輥1261搬送向曝光單元121c之基板P之寬度方向之位置。具體而言,如圖13所示,第1基板檢測部202係由檢測基板P之寬度方向之-Y側邊緣部Ea之Y方向位置的檢測部202a、與檢測+Y側之邊緣部Eb之Y方向位置的檢測部202b構成,根據來自兩檢測部202a、202b之檢 測訊號,測量基板P之寬度方向之位置變化。進一步的,第1基板檢測部202(202a、202b)亦可以是除了基板P之寬度方向之位置檢測以外,亦檢測(測量)關於基板P之姿勢變化(微幅傾斜)、基板P之變形(寬度方向之伸縮)等變化資訊的感測器構成。第1基板檢測部202所檢測之基板P於寬度方向之位置及基板P之變化資訊,被送至下位控制裝置204。又,第1基板檢測部202亦可檢測從邊緣位置控制器EPC3a搬送向固定輥126之基板P之寬度方向之位置。 The fixing roller 126 guides the substrate P whose width position is adjusted by the edge position controller EPC3a to the exposure unit 121c. With the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2, the drive roller NR, and the fixed roller 126, the substrate P is bent in the longitudinal direction and guided and conveyed. The first substrate detection section (substrate error measurement section, change measurement section) 202 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P that is conveyed from the fixed roller 1261 to the exposure unit 121c. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the first substrate detection unit 202 is a detection unit 202 a that detects a position in the Y direction of the -Y side edge portion Ea in the width direction of the substrate P, and a detection portion 202 a that detects the + Y side edge portion Eb. The detection unit 202b in the Y-direction position is configured based on the detection from the two detection units 202a and 202b. The measurement signal measures the position change in the width direction of the substrate P. Further, in addition to the position detection of the substrate P in the width direction, the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) may also detect (measure) the posture change (a slight tilt) of the substrate P, and the deformation (deformation of the substrate P) ( The sensor is configured to change information such as expansion and contraction in the width direction. The position of the substrate P in the width direction and the change information of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 are sent to the lower-level control device 204. The first substrate detection unit 202 may also detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P that is conveyed from the edge position controller EPC3a to the fixed roller 126.

以第1基板檢測部202測量基板P之姿勢變化、特別是測量在從固定輥126至曝光單元121c之與水平面(XY面)平行之搬送路上基板P繞X軸(YZ面內)之微幅傾斜之情形時,如圖14所示,係於檢測部202a、202b之各個,組裝可檢測基板P之邊緣部Ea、Eb各個之Z位置(基板P表面之法線方向高度位置)Ze1、Ze2之變化的Z感測器。由於檢測部202a、202b係於基板P之搬送方向與固定輥126相隔一定距離配置,因此相對固定輥126,曝光單元121c側(輥AR1)相對XY面微幅傾斜之情形時,以檢測部202a檢測之Z位置Ze1、與以檢測部202b檢測之Z位置Ze2的差分值會視傾斜量而變化。如上述的藉由求取差分值,固定輥126(位置調整單元120a)與曝光單元121c(輥AR1)之相對往Z方向之位置變化ΔZs即被抵消,在配置檢測部202a、202b之位置之基板P之微幅傾斜(X軸回)即能正確的求出。 The first substrate detection unit 202 measures the posture change of the substrate P, particularly the small width of the substrate P around the X axis (in the YZ plane) on the conveying path parallel to the horizontal plane (XY plane) from the fixed roller 126 to the exposure unit 121c. In the case of tilt, as shown in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 14, it is attached to each of the detection sections 202 a and 202 b, and the Z position (the height position in the direction of the normal line to the normal direction of the surface of the substrate P) Ze1 and Ze2 is assembled to detect the edge portions Ea and Eb of the substrate P Change of Z sensor. The detection sections 202a and 202b are arranged at a distance from the fixed roller 126 in the conveying direction of the substrate P. Therefore, when the exposure section 121c (roller AR1) is slightly inclined with respect to the fixed roller 126 and the XY plane, the detection section 202a is used. The difference between the detected Z position Ze1 and the Z position Ze2 detected by the detection unit 202b varies depending on the amount of tilt. As described above, by obtaining the difference value, the position change ΔZs between the fixed roller 126 (position adjustment unit 120a) and the exposure unit 121c (roller AR1) in the Z direction is cancelled, and the position of the detection unit 202a, 202b is disposed. Slight tilt of substrate P (X axis return ) Can be calculated correctly.

基板P之實際傾斜量(角度Δψ),若設檢測部202a、202b之Z感測器部之Y方向距離為Lz(一定值)的話,可以tanΔψ=(Ze1-Ze2)/Lz算出。如上所述,以組裝於檢測部202a、202b之Z感測器測量之基板P之微幅傾斜之變化,亦對應固定輥126、亦即位置調整單元120a與曝光單元 121c之相對繞Z軸的傾斜變化。作為Z感測器,可使用光學式或靜電容式的非接觸型間隙感測器等。又,在圖14之固定輥126與曝光單元121c側之第一個輥(AR1)之間之基板P,亦於長度方向賦予有一定張力。因此,雖然在其之間基板P撓曲之可能性低,但在張力小的場合亦會有發生撓曲的情形,以Z感測器進行之測量有可能會產生誤差。因此,檢測部202a、202b(Z感測器部)於基板P之長度方向(搬送方向),以配置在接近曝光單元121c側之第一個輥(AR1)之位置較佳。 The actual tilt amount (angle Δψ) of the substrate P can be calculated by tanΔψ = (Ze1-Ze2) / Lz if the Y-direction distance of the Z sensor section of the detection sections 202a and 202b is Lz (a fixed value). As described above, the change in the slight tilt of the substrate P measured by the Z sensors assembled in the detection sections 202a and 202b also corresponds to the fixed roller 126, that is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit. The relative tilt of 121c around the Z axis changes. As the Z sensor, an optical or capacitive non-contact gap sensor or the like can be used. The substrate P between the fixed roller 126 in FIG. 14 and the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side is also given a certain tension in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, although the possibility of deflection of the substrate P therebetween is low, deflection may occur even when the tension is small, and measurement with the Z sensor may cause errors. Therefore, it is preferable that the detection sections 202a and 202b (Z sensor section) are arranged in the longitudinal direction (conveying direction) of the substrate P to be located near the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side.

又,如圖14所示,從固定輥126來看,當在曝光單元121c(最初的輥AR1)於YZ面內傾斜之狀態下搬送基板P時,被輥AR1彎折後之基板P之搬送方向(-Z方向),不但會損及其與XZ平面之平行性、亦會因張力之作用而使得基板P往寬度方向之一方(+Y方向或-Y方向)慢慢的變位,其結果,被旋轉筒25支承之基板P亦會慢慢的往Y方向變位。位置調整單元120a(邊緣位置控制器EPC3a)之功能雖係修正基板P之此種Y方向的變位,但藉由包含設在曝光單元121c側之輥AR1的基板調整部214(詳待後敘)亦能加以修正。因此,根據以檢測部202a、202b檢測之與基板P之微幅傾斜(繞X軸)相關之變化資訊,控制位置調整單元120a與基板調整部214之其中一方或雙方,即能以高精度維持被旋轉筒25支承之基板P之Y方向位置。又,關於基板P到達旋轉筒25為止之寬度方向之位置調整,亦可由位置調整單元120a來進行粗調整,而以基板調整部214進行微調整。 As shown in FIG. 14, when the substrate P is transported with the exposure unit 121 c (the first roller AR1) inclined in the YZ plane as viewed from the fixed roller 126, the substrate P is transported by the roller AR1. The direction (-Z direction) will not only impair its parallelism with the XZ plane, but will also cause the substrate P to slowly shift to one of the width directions (+ Y direction or -Y direction) due to tension. As a result, the substrate P supported by the rotating cylinder 25 is gradually displaced in the Y direction. Although the function of the position adjustment unit 120a (edge position controller EPC3a) is to correct such a Y-direction displacement of the substrate P, the substrate adjustment unit 214 including a roller AR1 provided on the side of the exposure unit 121c (described later in detail) ) Can also be amended. Therefore, based on the change information related to the slight tilt of the substrate P (around the X axis) detected by the detection sections 202a, 202b, one or both of the position adjustment unit 120a and the substrate adjustment section 214 can be controlled to maintain it with high accuracy. The Y-direction position of the substrate P supported by the rotating cylinder 25. The position adjustment of the substrate P in the width direction until it reaches the rotating tube 25 may be performed by the position adjustment unit 120 a for coarse adjustment and fine adjustment by the substrate adjustment unit 214.

下位控制裝置204係控制位置調整單元120a之邊緣位置控制器EPC3a、或基板調整部214等,以控制基板P之寬度方向之位置。此下位控制裝置204可以是上位控制裝置5之一部分或全部,或者亦可以是受上位控制 裝置5控制、與上位控制裝置5不同之另一電腦。 The lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a of the position adjustment unit 120a, or the substrate adjustment unit 214, etc., to control the position in the width direction of the substrate P. This lower-level control device 204 may be a part or all of the upper-level control device 5, or may be controlled by a higher-level The device 5 controls another computer different from the higher-level control device 5.

曝光單元(圖案化裝置)121c,具備基板支承機構12a、第2基板檢測部208、照明機構13a、曝光頭(圖案形成部)210及下位控制裝置(控制部)212。曝光單元121c被收納在調溫室ECV內。此調溫室ECV,藉由將內部保持於既定温度,據以抑制在內部被搬送之基板P因温度產生之形狀變化。此調溫室ECV,透過被動或主動式除振台131配置在設置面E。 The exposure unit (patterning device) 121c includes a substrate support mechanism 12a, a second substrate detection section 208, an illumination mechanism 13a, an exposure head (pattern forming section) 210, and a lower control device (control section) 212. The exposure unit 121c is housed in the greenhouse ECV. In this greenhouse ECV, the temperature of the substrate P transferred inside is suppressed by keeping the inside at a predetermined temperature. The greenhouse ECV is disposed on the installation surface E through a passive or active vibration isolator 131.

基板支承機構(搬送部)12a係一邊支承從位置調整單元120a送來之基板P、一邊將之往下游側(+X方向)搬送者,從基板P之搬送方向上游側(-X方向側)起依序具有基板調整部214、引導輥Rs3、張力輥RT1、旋轉筒25、張力輥RT2及驅動輥R5、R6。 The substrate supporting mechanism (conveying section) 12a is a person who transports the substrate P sent from the position adjustment unit 120a to the downstream side (+ X direction) while supporting it from the upstream side (-X direction side) of the substrate P in the conveying direction. It has a substrate adjustment section 214, a guide roller Rs3, a tension roller RT1, a rotating drum 25, a tension roller RT2, and driving rollers R5 and R6 in this order.

基板調整部214具有複數個輥(AR1、RT3、AR2),藉由調整基板P之寬度方向之位置,據以一邊修正產生於基板P之扭曲及皺褶、一邊將基板P往搬送方向(+X方向)搬送。此基板調整部214之構成留待後敘。引導輥Rs3,將經基板調整部214調整了基板P之寬度方向位置之基板P搬送至旋轉筒25。旋轉筒25,一邊旋轉一邊以圓周面保持基板P上待曝光既定圖案之部分,同時將基板P往驅動輥R5、R6側搬送。關於驅動輥R5、R6之功能,如上述第1實施形態所述。張力輥RT1、RT2係用以對被捲繞支承於旋轉筒25之基板P賦予既定張力。又,圖13之參照符號215,係將基板調整部214之複數個輥、引導輥Rs3、張力輥RT1、旋轉筒25、張力輥RT2及驅動輥R5、R6支承為可旋轉之支承構件(曝光單元121c之本體框架)。 The substrate adjustment unit 214 has a plurality of rollers (AR1, RT3, AR2), and adjusts the position in the width direction of the substrate P, thereby correcting the distortion and wrinkles generated on the substrate P while moving the substrate P in the conveying direction (+ X direction) transport. The structure of the substrate adjustment section 214 will be described later. The guide roller Rs3 conveys the substrate P whose position in the width direction of the substrate P is adjusted by the substrate adjustment unit 214 to the rotating drum 25. The rotating cylinder 25 rotates while holding a portion of the substrate P to be exposed to a predetermined pattern on a circumferential surface, and simultaneously conveys the substrate P to the driving rollers R5 and R6. The functions of the driving rollers R5 and R6 are as described in the first embodiment. The tension rollers RT1 and RT2 are used to apply a predetermined tension to the substrate P that is wound and supported on the rotating drum 25. Reference numeral 215 in FIG. 13 indicates that a plurality of rollers, a guide roller Rs3, a tension roller RT1, a rotating drum 25, a tension roller RT2, and driving rollers R5 and R6 are supported as rotatable supporting members (exposure) The body frame of unit 121c).

圖16係顯示基板調整部214之構成的圖。基板調整部214具備調整輥AR1、AR2與張力輥RT3。調整輥AR1、張力輥RT3及調整輥AR2係從 基板P之搬送方向上游側(-X方向側)起依前述順序設置。此調整輥AR1、AR2,係配置成在有既定張力之狀態下,將基板P之搬送路徑加以彎折。具體而言,係藉由在調整輥AR1、AR2之下方側(-Z方向側)設置張力輥RT3,在藉由調整輥AR1、AR2施予既定張力之狀態下彎折搬送路徑。如此,從位置調整單元120a往+X方向搬送之基板P,即在有既定張力之狀態下被調整輥AR1彎折向下方(-Z方向)而被張力輥RT3引導,而從張力輥RT3往上方(+Z方向)搬送之基板P則在有既定張力之狀態下藉由調整輥AR2彎折向+X方向而被引導輥Rs3引導。又,張力輥RT3係以能在Z方向平行移動之方式於Y方向兩端被軸支,在基板P之搬送期間,於-Z方向產生既定彈壓力以對基板P賦予張力。 FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of the substrate adjustment section 214. The substrate adjustment unit 214 includes adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 and a tension roller RT3. Adjustment roller AR1, tension roller RT3 and adjustment roller AR2 are from The substrate P is provided in the order from the upstream side (-X direction side) in the conveying direction. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are arranged to bend the transport path of the substrate P under a predetermined tension. Specifically, the tension roller RT3 is provided below the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 (-Z direction side), and the conveyance path is bent while a predetermined tension is applied by the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2. In this way, the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120a to the + X direction is bent by the adjustment roller AR1 downward (-Z direction) under the state of a predetermined tension and guided by the tension roller RT3, and from the tension roller RT3 to The substrate P conveyed from above (+ Z direction) is guided by the guide roller Rs3 by being bent in the + X direction by the adjustment roller AR2 under a predetermined tension. In addition, the tension roller RT3 is axially supported at both ends in the Y direction so as to be able to move in the Z direction in parallel. During the transportation of the substrate P, a predetermined spring pressure is generated in the -Z direction to apply tension to the substrate P.

調整輥AR1可藉由軸承214a相對旋轉軸AX3a旋轉,調整輥AR2亦同樣的,可藉由軸承214b相對旋轉軸AX3b旋轉。旋轉軸AX3a、AX3b沿著Y方向平行設置。調整輥AR1、AR2可相對沿Y方向平行之軸傾斜。也就是說,調整輥AR1之旋轉軸AX3a之一端側(-Y方向側),可以另一端側(+Y方向側)為支點於Z方向及X方向微幅移動。調整輥AR2亦同樣的,旋轉軸AX3b之一端側(-Y方向側)可以另一端側(+Y方向側)為支點往X方向及Z方向移動。旋轉軸AX3a、AX3b之一端側(-Y方向側)之微幅移動,係藉由未圖示之壓電元件等之致動器加以驅動。藉由使調整輥AR1、AR2微幅傾斜,可隨著基板P之長度方向之搬送微調整基板P之寬度方向之位置,而能修正產生於基板P之些微的扭曲及因基板P之內部應力而產生之些微的面內變形(或皺褶)。又,圖16中,雖係使2個調整輥AR1、AR2能在XY面內或YZ面內微幅傾斜,但亦可不使調整輥AR1、AR2傾斜而將張力輥RT1 作成可傾斜。此外,亦可不使調整輥AR1傾斜,而將調整輥AR2與張力輥RT1作成可傾斜。 The adjustment roller AR1 can rotate relative to the rotation axis AX3a through the bearing 214a, and the adjustment roller AR2 can also rotate relative to the rotation axis AX3b through the bearing 214b. The rotation axes AX3a and AX3b are provided in parallel along the Y direction. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be inclined with respect to an axis parallel to the Y direction. That is, one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3a of the adjustment roller AR1 can be slightly moved in the Z direction and the X direction by using the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum. The adjustment roller AR2 is also the same, and one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3b can be moved to the X direction and Z direction by using the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum. The slight movement of one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axes AX3a and AX3b is driven by an actuator such as a piezoelectric element (not shown). By slightly adjusting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2, the position of the width direction of the substrate P can be finely adjusted as the substrate P is transported in the longitudinal direction, and it is possible to correct slight distortions generated in the substrate P and the internal stress of the substrate P There is a slight in-plane deformation (or wrinkle). In FIG. 16, although the two adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be slightly inclined in the XY plane or the YZ plane, the tension roller RT1 can also be adjusted without tilting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2. Made tiltable. In addition, the adjustment roller AR1 and the tension roller RT1 may be made tiltable without tilting the adjustment roller AR1.

第2基板檢測部(基板誤差測量部、變化測量部)208,檢測從張力輥RT1朝旋轉筒25往+Z方向搬送之基板P於寬度方向之位置。具體而言,如圖15所示,第2基板檢測部208分別在基板P之寬度方向兩端側設置,以檢測基板P之寬度方向兩端部之邊緣。圖17A係顯示第2基板檢測部208之構成的圖、圖17B係顯示以第2基板檢測部208對基板P照射之光束Bm的圖、圖17C係顯示以第2基板檢測部208受光之光束Bm的圖。第2基板檢測部208具備照射光束Bm之照射系216、與接收光束Bm之受光系218。照射系216具有投光部220、柱面透鏡222及反射鏡224,受光系218具有反射鏡226、成像光學系228及攝影元件230。投光部220包含發出光束Bm之光源、將發出之光束Bm照射向基板P。投光部220所照射之光束Bm,透過柱面透鏡222及反射鏡224,照射於基板P上。柱面透鏡222,如圖17B所示,使射入之光束Bm於Z方向收斂,成為在基板P上與基板P之Y方向平行之狹縫狀光束Bm。將此照相向基板P之光束Bm之長度設為Lbm。朝基板P側照射之光束Bm之至少一部分被基板P反射,未照射到基板P之殘部之光束Bm則不會被基板P反射而維持直進。 The second substrate detection section (substrate error measurement section, change measurement section) 208 detects the position of the substrate P that is transported from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotary cylinder 25 in the + Z direction in the width direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the second substrate detection units 208 are respectively provided on both ends in the width direction of the substrate P to detect edges in both ends of the substrate P in the width direction. 17A is a diagram showing a configuration of the second substrate detection unit 208, FIG. 17B is a diagram showing a light beam Bm irradiated to the substrate P by the second substrate detection unit 208, and FIG. 17C is a diagram showing a light beam received by the second substrate detection unit 208 Bm figure. The second substrate detection unit 208 includes an irradiation system 216 that irradiates the light beam Bm, and a light receiving system 218 that receives the light beam Bm. The irradiation system 216 includes a light projection unit 220, a cylindrical lens 222, and a reflecting mirror 224, and the light receiving system 218 includes a reflecting mirror 226, an imaging optical system 228, and an imaging element 230. The light projection unit 220 includes a light source that emits a light beam Bm, and irradiates the emitted light beam Bm to the substrate P. The light beam Bm irradiated by the light projecting unit 220 passes through the cylindrical lens 222 and the reflecting mirror 224 and is irradiated on the substrate P. As shown in FIG. 17B, the cylindrical lens 222 converges the incident light beam Bm in the Z direction, and becomes a slit-shaped light beam Bm on the substrate P parallel to the Y direction of the substrate P. The length of the light beam Bm photographed toward the substrate P is set to Lbm. At least a part of the light beam Bm irradiated toward the substrate P side is reflected by the substrate P, and the light beam Bm that is not irradiated to the remainder of the substrate P is not reflected by the substrate P and remains straight.

於基板P反射之狹縫狀光束Bm透過反射鏡226射入成像光學系228。成像光學系228,使從反射鏡226反射而來之光束Bm成像在攝影元件230上,攝影元件230拍攝射入之光束Bm。以此攝影元件230拍攝之光束Bm之長度,如圖17C所示,為在基板P反射之光束Bm之長度Lbm1,因此測量此Lbm1之長度即能檢測基板P之邊緣之位置。由於具有此種構成,第2基板檢 測部208能高精度檢測從張力輥RT1朝向旋轉筒25往+Z方向搬送之基板P於寬度方向之位置。又,第2基板檢測部208,藉由檢測基板P之位置即能檢測(測量)與基板P之寬度方向之位置變化、基板P之變形(寬度方向之伸縮)等相關之變化資訊。第2基板檢測部208所檢測之基板P於寬度方向之位置及基板P之變化資訊,被送至下位控制裝置204。參照符號230a係顯示攝影元件230之拍攝區域。又,第1基板檢測部202之構成亦可作成與第2基板檢測部208相同。 The slit-shaped light beam Bm reflected on the substrate P passes through the mirror 226 and enters the imaging optical system 228. The imaging optical system 228 images the light beam Bm reflected from the mirror 226 on the imaging element 230, and the imaging element 230 captures the incident light beam Bm. As shown in FIG. 17C, the length of the light beam Bm captured by this photographing element 230 is the length Lbm1 of the light beam Bm reflected on the substrate P. Therefore, measuring the length of this Lbm1 can detect the position of the edge of the substrate P. With this structure, the second substrate inspection The measuring unit 208 can accurately detect the position of the substrate P transferred in the + Z direction from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotating drum 25 in the width direction. In addition, the second substrate detection unit 208 can detect (measure) the change information related to the position change in the width direction of the substrate P, the deformation of the substrate P (the expansion and contraction in the width direction), and the like by detecting the position of the substrate P. The position of the substrate P in the width direction and the change information of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 are sent to the lower-level control device 204. Reference numeral 230a indicates a photographing area of the photographing element 230. The configuration of the first substrate detection unit 202 may be the same as that of the second substrate detection unit 208.

曝光單元121c之各對準顯微鏡(基板誤差測量部、變化測量部)AM1、AM2,沿著基板P之寬度方向設有複數個,檢測如圖15所示之形成在基板P上之對準標記Ks。圖15所示之例中,對準標記Ks係於基板P之兩端部側沿基板P之長度方向以一定間隔形成,於基板P上長度方向排列之曝光區域A7與曝光區域A7之間,沿著基板P之寬度方向以一定間隔設有5個。因此,為能檢測基板P上形成之對準標記Ks,對準顯微鏡AM1(參照圖19)、AM2係於基板P之寬度方向以一定間隔設有5個。藉由對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2檢測對準標記Ks,即能高精度檢測在被旋轉筒25支承之同時被搬送之基板P於寬度方向之位置。又,對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2亦可藉由檢測對準標記Ks之位置,據以檢測(測量)與基板P之寬度方向之位置變化、姿勢變化、基板P之變形等相關之變化資訊。 Each of the alignment microscopes (substrate error measurement section and change measurement section) AM1 and AM2 of the exposure unit 121c is provided with a plurality of along the width direction of the substrate P, and the alignment marks formed on the substrate P as shown in FIG. 15 are detected. Ks. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the alignment marks Ks are formed at both ends of the substrate P at a certain interval along the length direction of the substrate P, between the exposure area A7 and the exposure area A7 arranged in the length direction on the substrate P. Five are provided at regular intervals along the width direction of the substrate P. Therefore, in order to detect the alignment marks Ks formed on the substrate P, five alignment microscopes AM1 (refer to FIG. 19) and AM2 are provided at a certain interval in the width direction of the substrate P. By detecting the alignment marks Ks by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, it is possible to detect the position of the substrate P that is transported while being supported by the rotating cylinder 25 in the width direction with high accuracy. In addition, the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 can detect (measure) change information related to the position change in the width direction of the substrate P, the posture change, and the deformation of the substrate P by detecting the position of the alignment mark Ks.

以此對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2檢測之對準標記Ks於長度方向(搬送方向)與寬度方向各個之位置資訊被送至下位控制裝置212。下位控制裝置212根據所取得之對準標記Ks之位置資訊,生成用以修正圖案形成位置之修正資訊送至曝光頭(圖案形成部)210,並計算基板P於寬度方向之位 置及基板P之變化資訊送至下位控制裝置204。又,圖15中之參照符號232係表示各對準顯微鏡AM1之檢測區域(檢測視野),於基板P之搬送方向(圖15中為Z方向)之5個檢測區域232之位置,係設定在基板P安定的緊貼在旋轉筒25外周面之位置。檢測區域232在基板P上之大小雖係視對準標記Ks之大小及對準精度(位置測量精度)加以設定,但約是100~500μm方型程度之大小。 The position information of each of the alignment marks Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 in the longitudinal direction (conveying direction) and the width direction is sent to the lower control device 212. The lower control device 212 generates correction information for correcting the pattern forming position based on the obtained position information of the alignment mark Ks and sends the correction information to the exposure head (pattern forming section) 210, and calculates the position of the substrate P in the width direction. The change information of the position and the substrate P is sent to the lower control device 204. Reference numeral 232 in FIG. 15 indicates the detection area (detection field of view) of each alignment microscope AM1, and the positions of the five detection areas 232 in the transport direction of the substrate P (Z direction in FIG. 15) are set at The substrate P is firmly in close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating tube 25. Although the size of the detection area 232 on the substrate P is set depending on the size of the alignment mark Ks and the alignment accuracy (position measurement accuracy), it is about 100 to 500 μm square.

又,如圖12所示,在位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之間,設有檢測(測量)關於位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置及位置變化之變化資訊的相對位置檢測部(位置誤差測量部、變化測量部)234。圖18係顯示相對位置檢測部234之構成的圖。相對位置檢測部234,係在位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之間之-Y方向端部側與+Y方向端部側分別設置。相對位置檢測部234,具有檢測在YZ平面之位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置變化的第1檢測部236、以及檢測在XZ平面之位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置變化的第2檢測部238。如此,相對位置檢測部234即能於3維(XYZ空間)檢測位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置及變化資訊。 As shown in FIG. 12, a relative position detecting unit (for detecting (measuring) change information on the relative position and position change of the position adjusting unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is provided between the position adjusting unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c ( Position error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 234. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration of the relative position detection unit 234. The relative position detection section 234 is provided on the −Y direction end side and the + Y direction end side between the position adjustment unit 120 a and the exposure unit 121 c, respectively. The relative position detection unit 234 includes a first detection unit 236 that detects a change in the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c on the YZ plane, and a relative position detection unit that detects a change in the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c on the XZ plane. The second detection unit 238. In this way, the relative position detection unit 234 can detect the relative position and change information of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in three dimensions (XYZ space).

第1檢測部236,具有朝向+X方向照射雷射光的投光部240a、與接收投光部240a照射之雷射光的受光部242a。第2檢測部238,具有朝向+Y方向照射雷射光的投光部240b、與接收投光部240b照射之雷射光的受光部242b。第1檢測部236之投光部240a及第2檢測部238之投光部240b,設置在位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c對向之面側(+X方向側)。又,第1檢測部236之受光部242b及第2檢測部238之受光部242b,設置在曝光單元121c與位 置調整單元120a對向之面側(-X方向側)。 The first detection unit 236 includes a light projecting unit 240a that irradiates laser light in the + X direction, and a light receiving unit 242a that receives laser light irradiated by the light projecting unit 240a. The second detection unit 238 includes a light projecting unit 240b that radiates laser light in the + Y direction, and a light receiving unit 242b that receives laser light irradiated by the light projecting unit 240b. The light projection section 240a of the first detection section 236 and the light projection section 240b of the second detection section 238 are provided on the surface side (+ X direction side) of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c facing each other. The light receiving portion 242b of the first detection portion 236 and the light receiving portion 242b of the second detection portion 238 are provided in the exposure unit 121c and the position. The facing side (-X direction side) of the facing adjustment unit 120a.

受光部242a、242b係以4分割感測器構成。也就是說,受光部242a、242b具有4個光二極體(光電轉換元件)244,使用此4個光二極體244之各個所接收之受光量差(訊號位準之差)檢測在與雷射光之光束中心垂直之面內的位置變化。由於射入受光部242a之雷射光係前進於+X方向之光,因此受光部242a係檢測在與X方向垂直之YZ平面之雷射光中心位置及位置變化。又,由於射入受光部242b之雷射光係前進於+Y方向之光,因此受光部242b係檢測在與Y方向垂直之XZ平面之雷射光中心位置及位置變化。如此,即能以3維檢測(測量)關於位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置及位置變化的變化資訊。特別是,可藉由於Y方向分離之一對第1檢測部236之各檢測資訊之差及平均,即時測量位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c繞X軸之相對旋轉誤差(在YZ面內之相對傾斜)與Y方向之相對位置誤差。此外,藉由於Y方向分離之一對第2檢測部238之各檢測資訊之差,可即時測量位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c繞Z軸之相對旋轉誤差(在XY面內之相對傾斜)。 The light-receiving sections 242a and 242b are configured by a four-segment sensor. That is, the light-receiving sections 242a and 242b have four photodiodes (photoelectric conversion elements) 244, and the difference between the received light amount (the difference in signal level) received by each of the four photodiodes 244 is used to detect the difference between the received light and the laser light. The position of the beam center perpendicular to the beam changes. Since the laser light that has entered the light receiving section 242a is light that advances in the + X direction, the light receiving section 242a detects the center position and position change of the laser light in the YZ plane perpendicular to the X direction. In addition, since the laser light that has entered the light receiving section 242b is light traveling in the + Y direction, the light receiving section 242b detects the center position and position change of the laser light in the XZ plane perpendicular to the Y direction. In this way, it is possible to detect (measure) the change information on the relative position and position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in three dimensions. In particular, it is possible to measure the relative rotation error of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c about the X axis (relative in the YZ plane) due to the difference and average of the detection information of the first detection unit 236 separated by the Y direction. Relative tilt between Y) and Y. In addition, the relative rotation error (relative tilt in the XY plane) of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c can be measured in real time by the difference between the detection information of the second detection unit 238 separated by the Y direction.

回到圖12之說明,照明機構13a具有雷射光源,係用以射出用在曝光之雷射光(曝光光束)LB。此雷射光LB,可以是在370nm以下之波長帶具有峰值波長之紫外線光。雷射光LB亦可以是以震盪頻率數Fs發光之脈衝光。從照明機構13a射出之雷射光LB,射入曝光頭210。 Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the illumination mechanism 13 a has a laser light source for emitting laser light (exposure light beam) LB used for exposure. The laser light LB may be ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength in a wavelength band below 370 nm. The laser light LB may also be a pulse light that emits light at an oscillation frequency Fs. The laser light LB emitted from the illumination mechanism 13 a is incident on the exposure head 210.

曝光頭210,具備來自照明機構13a之雷射光LB分別射入之複數個描繪單元DU(DU1~DU5)。也就是說,來自照明機構13a之雷射光LB被具有反射鏡或分束器等之光導入光學系250引導而射入複數個描繪單元 DU(DU1~DU5)。曝光頭210,對基板支承機構12a搬送、被旋轉筒25之圓周面支承之基板P之一部分,藉由複數個描繪單元DU(DU1~DU5)描繪圖案。曝光頭210,具有構成相同之複數個描繪單元DU(DU1~DU5),而被稱為多光束型之曝光頭210。描繪單元DU1、DU3、DU5相對旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2配置在基板P之搬送方向上游側(-X方向側),描繪單元DU2、DU4則相對旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2配置在基板P之搬送方向下游側(+X方向側)。 The exposure head 210 includes a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) into which the laser light LB from the illumination mechanism 13a is incident. That is, the laser light LB from the illuminating mechanism 13a is guided by a light introduction optical system 250 having a mirror or a beam splitter, and enters a plurality of drawing units. DU (DU1 ~ DU5). The exposure head 210 draws a pattern on a part of the substrate P conveyed by the substrate supporting mechanism 12a and supported by the peripheral surface of the rotary cylinder 25 by a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5). The exposure head 210 has a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) constituting the same, and is referred to as a multi-beam type exposure head 210. The drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 are arranged on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the rotation axis AX2 of the rotation cylinder 25, and the drawing units DU2, DU4 are arranged on the substrate P relative to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotation cylinder 25 Downstream side in the transport direction (+ X direction side).

各描繪單元DU使射入之雷射光LB在基板P上收斂成點光,且沿著掃描線以旋轉多面鏡(polygon mirror)等高速掃描該點光。各描繪單元DU之掃描線L,如圖19所示,係設定成於Y方向(基板P之寬度方向)彼此不分離而連接。圖19中,以L1代表描繪單元DU1之掃描線L、以L2代表描繪單元DU2之掃描線L。同樣的,以L3、L4、L5表示描繪單元DU3、DU4、DU5之掃描線L。如以上所述,以所有描繪單元DU1~DU5涵蓋曝光區域A7之寬度方向全部之方式,各描繪單元DU分攤掃描區域。又,例如,將1個描繪單元DU進行之Y方向之描繪寬(掃描線L之長度)設為20~50mm程度的話,藉由將奇數號之描繪單元DU1、DU3、DU5之3個、與偶數號之描繪單元DU2、DU4之2個合計5個描繪單元DU配置於Y方向,來將描繪可能之Y方向寬度擴張至100~250mm程度。又,對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2係較掃描線L1、L3、L5設在基板P之搬送方向上游側(-X方向側),且檢測一邊被緊貼支承在旋轉筒25之圓周面、一邊被搬送之基板上形成的對準標記Ks。 Each drawing unit DU converges the incident laser light LB into spot light on the substrate P, and scans the spot light at high speed along a scanning line with a rotating polygon mirror or the like. As shown in FIG. 19, the scanning lines L of the respective drawing units DU are set to be connected in the Y direction (the width direction of the substrate P) without being separated from each other. In FIG. 19, the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU1 is represented by L1, and the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU2 is represented by L2. Similarly, the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU3, DU4, and DU5 are represented by L3, L4, and L5. As described above, each of the drawing units DU1 to DU5 distributes the scanning area in such a manner that all the width directions of the exposure area A7 are covered. For example, if the drawing width (length of the scanning line L) in the Y direction by one drawing unit DU is set to about 20 to 50 mm, three odd-numbered drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5, and A total of five even drawing units DU2 and DU4, five drawing units DU, are arranged in the Y direction to expand the width in the Y direction that can be drawn to about 100 to 250 mm. The alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 are located on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the substrate P in the conveying direction from the scanning lines L1, L3, and L5. An alignment mark Ks formed on the substrate being transported.

此描繪單元DU係如國際公開第2013/146184號小冊子(參照圖36)所揭示之公知技術,使用圖20針對描繪單元DU簡單的說明。又, 由於各描繪單元DU(DU1~DU5)具有相同構成,因此僅說明描繪單元DU2,其他描繪單元DU之說明則予以省略。 This drawing unit DU is a known technique disclosed in International Publication No. 2013/146184 (refer to FIG. 36), and the drawing unit DU will be briefly described using FIG. 20. also, Since each drawing unit DU (DU1 to DU5) has the same configuration, only the drawing unit DU2 will be described, and the description of the other drawing units DU will be omitted.

如圖20所示,描繪單元DU2,具有例如集光透鏡252、描繪用光學元件(光變調器)254、吸收體256、準直透鏡258、反射鏡260、柱面透鏡262、聚焦透鏡264、反射鏡266、多面鏡(光掃描構件)268、反射鏡270、f-θ透鏡272及柱面透鏡274。 As shown in FIG. 20, the drawing unit DU2 includes, for example, a collecting lens 252, a drawing optical element (light modulator) 254, an absorber 256, a collimating lens 258, a reflecting mirror 260, a cylindrical lens 262, a focusing lens 264, A reflecting mirror 266, a polygon mirror (light scanning member) 268, a reflecting mirror 270, an f-θ lens 272, and a cylindrical lens 274.

射入描繪單元DU2之雷射光LB從鉛直方向之上方往下方(-Z方向)前進,透過集光透鏡252射入描繪用光學元件254。集光透鏡252,使射入描繪用光學元件254之雷射光LB於描繪用光學元件254內集光(收斂)成光束腰(beam waist)。描繪用光學元件254對雷射光LB具有穿透性,例如係使用聲光元件(AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)。 The laser light LB that has entered the drawing unit DU2 advances downward from the vertical direction (-Z direction), and enters the drawing optical element 254 through the light collecting lens 252. The light collecting lens 252 collects (converges) the laser light LB that has entered the optical element 254 for drawing into a beam waist within the optical element 254 for drawing. The optical element 254 for drawing is transparent to the laser light LB, and an acousto-optic element (AOM: Acousto-Optic Modulator) is used, for example.

描繪用光學元件254,在來自下位控制裝置212之驅動訊號(高頻訊號)為OFF狀態時,係使射入之雷射光LB穿透至吸收體256側,在來自下位控制裝置212之驅動訊號(高頻訊號)為ON狀態時,則使射入之雷射光LB返回朝向反射鏡260。吸收體256,係為抑制雷射光LB漏至外部而吸收雷射光LB之光阱(light trap)。如前所述,依據圖案資料(黒白)對待施加至描繪用光學元件254之描繪用驅動訊號(超音波之頻率)高速的進行ON/OFF,據以切換雷射光LB是朝向反射鏡260、或朝向吸收體256。此情形,於基板P上觀察時,即係代表到達感光面之雷射光LB(點光SP)之強度,依據圖案資料高速的調變為高位準與低位準(例如、0位準)中之任一者。 When the driving optical signal (high-frequency signal) from the lower control device 212 is OFF, the drawing optical element 254 penetrates the incident laser light LB to the absorber 256 side, and the driving signal from the lower control device 212 When the (high-frequency signal) is ON, the incident laser light LB is returned to the reflecting mirror 260. The absorber 256 is a light trap that absorbs the laser light LB to prevent the laser light LB from leaking to the outside. As described above, the drawing driving signal (frequency of ultrasonic waves) to be applied to the drawing optical element 254 is turned on and off at high speed based on the pattern data (white), and the laser light LB is switched to the mirror 260, or Towards the absorber 256. In this case, when viewed on the substrate P, it represents the intensity of the laser light LB (spot light SP) reaching the photosensitive surface, which is adjusted to a high level and a low level (for example, 0 level) at a high speed according to the pattern data. Either.

準直透鏡258,使從描繪用光學元件254朝向反射鏡260之雷射光LB成為平行光。反射鏡260,使射入之雷射光LB反射向-X方向,透過 柱面透鏡262、聚焦透鏡264照射於反射鏡266。反射鏡266,將射入之雷射光LB照射於多面鏡268。多面鏡(旋轉多面鏡)268,藉由旋轉使雷射光LB之反射角連續變化,使照射於基板P上之雷射光LB之位置掃描於掃描方向(基板P之寬度方向)。多面鏡268係藉由未圖示之旋轉驅動源(例如,馬達及減速機構等)以一定速度(例如1萬轉/分)旋轉。 The collimating lens 258 converts the laser light LB from the drawing optical element 254 toward the reflecting mirror 260 into parallel light. The reflecting mirror 260 reflects the incident laser light LB in the -X direction and transmits it The cylindrical lens 262 and the focusing lens 264 are irradiated on the reflecting mirror 266. The reflecting mirror 266 irradiates the incident laser light LB to the polygon mirror 268. The polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror) 268 continuously changes the reflection angle of the laser light LB by rotation, and scans the position of the laser light LB irradiated on the substrate P in the scanning direction (the width direction of the substrate P). The polygon mirror 268 is rotated at a certain speed (for example, 10,000 rpm) by a rotation drive source (for example, a motor, a reduction mechanism, etc.), which is not shown.

設在反射鏡260與反射鏡266間之柱面透鏡262,與聚焦透鏡264連動,在與前述掃描方向正交之非掃描方向(Z方向)將雷射光LB集光(收斂)在多面鏡268之反射面上。藉由此柱面透鏡262,即使有前述反射面相對Z方向傾斜之情形(從XY面之法線與前述反射面之平衡狀態傾斜),亦能抑制其影響,以抑制照射於基板P上之雷射光LB之照射位置於X方向偏離。 A cylindrical lens 262 provided between the reflecting mirror 260 and the reflecting mirror 266 is linked with the focusing lens 264 and collects (converges) the laser light LB on the polygon mirror 268 in a non-scanning direction (Z direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction. The reflective surface. With this cylindrical lens 262, even if the aforementioned reflecting surface is inclined with respect to the Z direction (inclined from the normal state of the XY plane and the equilibrium state of the aforementioned reflecting surface), its influence can be suppressed to suppress the irradiation on the substrate P. The irradiation position of the laser light LB is deviated in the X direction.

被多面鏡268反射之雷射光LB,因反射鏡270而被反射向-Z方向,射入具有與Z軸平行之光軸AXu的f-θ透鏡272。此f-θ透鏡272係投射於基板P之雷射光LB之主光線於掃描中隨時為基板P表面之法線的遠心系,藉由此,能使雷射光LB於Y方向正確的以等速度掃描。從f-θ透鏡272照射之雷射光LB,透過母線與Y方向平行之柱面透鏡274成為直徑數μm程度之略圓形的微小點光SP照射在基板P上。點光(掃描點光)SP,藉由多面鏡268沿延伸於Y方向之掃描線L2於一方向進行1維掃描。 The laser light LB reflected by the polygon mirror 268 is reflected in the -Z direction by the mirror 270 and enters the f-θ lens 272 having an optical axis AXu parallel to the Z axis. The f-θ lens 272 is a telecentric system in which the main ray of the laser light LB projected on the substrate P is at all times the normal line of the surface of the substrate P during scanning, so that the laser light LB can be accurately moved at a constant velocity in the Y direction. scanning. The laser light LB radiated from the f-θ lens 272 passes through the cylindrical lens 274 whose bus bar is parallel to the Y direction, and becomes a small circular spot light SP having a diameter of about several μm, which is irradiated on the substrate P. The spot light (scanning spot light) SP performs one-dimensional scanning in one direction by a polygon mirror 268 along a scanning line L2 extending in the Y direction.

下位控制裝置212控制照明機構13a及曝光頭210等,將圖案賦予於基板P。也就是說,下位控制裝置212控制照明機構13a照射雷射光LB並根據對準顯微鏡AM1檢測之對準標記Ks之位置,控制曝光頭210之各描繪單元DU所具有之描繪用光學元件254,據以在基板P上之既定位置,也就是 說,於曝光區域A7描繪曝光出圖案。此下位控制裝置212可以是上位控制裝置5之一部分或全部,亦可以是受上位控制裝置5控制、與上位控制裝置5不同之另一電腦。 The lower control device 212 controls the lighting mechanism 13a, the exposure head 210, and the like, and applies a pattern to the substrate P. That is, the lower control device 212 controls the illuminating mechanism 13a to irradiate the laser light LB and controls the drawing optical element 254 included in each drawing unit DU of the exposure head 210 based on the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscope AM1. At a predetermined position on the substrate P, that is, In other words, an exposure pattern is drawn on the exposure area A7. The lower-level control device 212 may be a part or all of the upper-level control device 5, or may be another computer controlled by the upper-level control device 5 and different from the upper-level control device 5.

此處,在基板P之長度方向與旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2正交、基板P未產生扭曲或皺褶等之狀態將基板P搬送至旋轉筒25,即能提升圖案對基板P之曝光精度。因此,最好是能將進行曝光裝置U3之基板搬送的各輥(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)及旋轉筒25之旋轉軸彼此沿著Y方向平行配置,並以基板P之長度方向相對此等各輥及旋轉筒25之旋轉軸正交之方式搬送基板P較佳。 Here, the substrate P is transported to the rotating cylinder 25 in a state where the length direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating cylinder 25 and the substrate P is not twisted or wrinkled. . Therefore, it is preferable that the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, and R6) and the rotation axis of the rotating tube 25 can be aligned with each other in the Y direction. It is preferable to arrange the substrates P in parallel, and transport the substrates P in such a manner that the longitudinal direction of the substrates P is orthogonal to the rotation axes of the rollers and the rotating drum 25.

然而,實際上,卻會有各輥(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)設置成旋轉軸些微的偏離、各輥之旋轉軸彼此不平行之情形。此外,亦會有因振動等而使得位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之位置相對變化,導致位置調整單元120a之輥之旋轉軸與曝光單元121c之輥之旋轉軸不平行之情形。如此,會於基板P內部產生些微之應力紊亂、扭曲或皺褶等,使得在基板P之長度方向相對旋轉筒25之旋轉軸AX2些微傾斜之狀態下進行捲繞,導致在與待描繪至基板P之圖案之線寬尺寸相較大幅變形(面內畸變)的狀態下被支承於旋轉筒25。 However, in reality, the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, and R6) are set to slightly deviate from the rotation axis, and the rotation axes of the rollers are not parallel to each other. In addition, the position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c may be relatively changed due to vibration or the like, which may cause the rotation axis of the roller of the position adjustment unit 120a and the rotation axis of the roller of the exposure unit 121c to be non-parallel. In this way, a slight stress disorder, distortion, or wrinkle will be generated inside the substrate P, so that the winding is performed in a state where the length direction of the substrate P is slightly inclined with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotary cylinder 25, resulting in the The pattern P is supported by the rotating cylinder 25 in a state where the line width dimension is relatively deformed (in-plane distortion).

因此,第4實施形態中,下位控制裝置204係根據第1基板檢測部202、第2基板檢測部208、對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2及相對位置檢測部234之檢測結果,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a及基板調整部214。 Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, the alignment microscope AM1, AM2, and the relative position detection unit 234. And substrate adjustment section 214.

詳言之,下位控制裝置204係根據第1基板檢測部202所檢測之基板P在寬度方向之位置及基板P之變化資訊,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a 之致動器(驅動機構)206,據以調整基板P在寬度方向之位置。例如,下位控制裝置204,算出從第1基板檢測部202所檢測之基板P之兩端部邊緣位置求出之Y方向中心位置與目標位置的差,以使該算出之差為零(0)之方式對致動器206進行回饋控制,使基板P往Y方向移動。據此,及能使從位置調整單元120a搬送之基板P之寬度方向之位置成為目標位置,抑制基板P產生微小的扭曲及皺褶等。如此,即能將捲繞於旋轉筒25之基板P之Y方向位置以高精度維持一定,將排列於基板P之長度方向之複數個對準標記Ks,在各對準顯微鏡AM1之檢測區域(檢測視野)232內確實的持續加以捕捉。 In detail, the lower-position control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a based on the position of the substrate P in the width direction and the change information of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202. The actuator (drive mechanism) 206 adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction. For example, the lower control device 204 calculates the difference between the center position in the Y direction and the target position obtained from the edge positions of both ends of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 so that the calculated difference is zero (0) In this way, the actuator 206 performs feedback control to move the substrate P in the Y direction. Accordingly, the position in the width direction of the substrate P transferred from the position adjustment unit 120a can be made the target position, and the substrate P can be prevented from generating slight twists, wrinkles, and the like. In this way, the Y-direction position of the substrate P wound around the rotating cylinder 25 can be maintained at a high accuracy, and the plurality of alignment marks Ks arranged in the length direction of the substrate P can be detected in the detection area of each alignment microscope AM1 ( Detection field of view) 232 is continuously captured.

又,下位控制裝置204,可使用與相對位置檢測部234所檢測之位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置及位置變化相關的變化資訊,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a之致動器206,據以提早修正基板P在寬度方向之位置變化(伴隨傾斜狀態變化之基板P往寬度方向之位移)。又,下位控制裝置204,可根據與相對位置檢測部234所檢測之相對位置及位置變化相關之資訊,調整基板調整部214之調整輥AR1、AR2之傾斜角度,據以調整基板P在寬度方向之位置。此調整輥AR1、AR2之傾斜角度之調整可藉由驅動前述壓電元件等之致動器(驅動部)來實施。如此,即使是在位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置產生變化之情形時,亦能將搬送至旋轉筒25之基板P在寬度方向之位置以高精度、高回應性持續設定在目標位置,抑制在基板P產生微小的扭曲或皺褶等。 In addition, the lower-level control device 204 can control the actuator 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a by using change information related to the relative positions and position changes of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c detected by the relative position detection unit 234. The position change of the substrate P in the width direction (the displacement of the substrate P with the change in the tilted state in the width direction) is corrected in advance. In addition, the lower control device 204 can adjust the inclination angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 of the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on information related to the relative position and the position change detected by the relative position detection unit 234, thereby adjusting the width of the substrate P in the width direction. Its location. The adjustment of the tilt angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be performed by driving an actuator (driving unit) of the aforementioned piezoelectric element or the like. In this way, even when the relative positions of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are changed, the position of the substrate P transported to the rotary drum 25 in the width direction can be continuously set at the target position with high accuracy and high responsiveness. To suppress the generation of minute twists or wrinkles on the substrate P.

又,從對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2所檢測之對準標記Ks之位置亦能得知與基板P在寬度方向之位置、及基板P之微小扭曲及皺摺等基板P之姿勢變化、變形相關的變化資訊。因此,下位控制裝置204根據所檢測之對準 標記Ks之位置,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a(致動器206)及基板調整部214(前述壓電元件等之致動器)據以調整基板P在寬度方向之位置。如此,即能將搬送至旋轉筒25之基板P在寬度方向之位置以高精度、高回應性設定在目標位置,抑制在基板P產生微小的扭曲或皺褶等。 In addition, from the positions of the alignment marks Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, it is also known that the position of the substrate P in the width direction, and the posture change and deformation of the substrate P, such as the small twists and wrinkles of the substrate P, can be known. Change information. Therefore, the lower control device 204 is based on the detected alignment. The position of the mark Ks controls the edge position controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjusting section 214 (actuator such as the aforementioned piezoelectric element) to adjust the position of the substrate P in the width direction. In this way, the position of the substrate P transported to the rotating drum 25 in the width direction can be set to the target position with high accuracy and high responsiveness, and the occurrence of slight distortion or wrinkles on the substrate P can be suppressed.

又,下位控制裝置204,根據第2基板檢測部208所檢測之搬送至旋轉筒25前一刻之基板P之寬度方向之位置,確認基板P在寬度方向之位置是否位於目標位置、或基板P是否有產生扭曲(傾斜)等。基板P之扭曲(傾斜)之檢測,係加大以圖17A所說明之檢測系進行之光束Bm對基板P入射角,在基板P偏移向表面之法線方向(圖17A中為X方向)時,利用在攝影元件230之拍攝區域230a內光束Bm之反射像Bm會偏移向Z方向即可。由於第2基板檢測部208亦係對應基板P兩側之邊緣部Ea、Eb之各個設置,因此藉比較反射光束Bm之像在拍攝區域230a內往Z方向之偏移量(求差值),亦能求出於基板P之寬度方向之微小傾斜量。 In addition, the lower control device 204 confirms whether the position of the substrate P in the width direction is located at the target position or the substrate P based on the position of the substrate P in the width direction immediately before being transported to the rotary drum 25 detected by the second substrate detection unit 208. Distortion (tilt) may occur. The detection of the distortion (tilt) of the substrate P is to increase the incident angle of the light beam Bm to the substrate P using the detection system illustrated in FIG. 17A, and the substrate P is shifted to the surface normal direction (the X direction in FIG. 17A). In this case, it is sufficient to use the reflection image Bm of the light beam Bm in the shooting area 230a of the photographing element 230 to shift in the Z direction. Since the second substrate detection unit 208 is also provided corresponding to each of the edge portions Ea, Eb on both sides of the substrate P, by comparing the offset (differentiation) of the image of the reflected light beam Bm in the Z direction within the shooting area 230a, It is also possible to obtain a slight amount of inclination in the width direction of the substrate P.

當基板P在寬度方向之位置不在目標位置之情形時,下位控制裝置204根據第2基板檢測部208所檢測之基板P在寬度方向之位置及基板P之變化資訊控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a(致動器206)及基板調整部214(前述壓電元件等之致動器),據以調整基板P在寬度方向之位置。據此,及能使搬送至旋轉筒25之基板P在寬度方向之位置成為目標位置。 When the position of the substrate P in the width direction is not the target position, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a (to the edge position controller EPC3a based on the position of the substrate P in the width direction and the change information of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208) The actuator 206) and the substrate adjustment unit 214 (the actuator of the aforementioned piezoelectric element or the like) adjust the position of the substrate P in the width direction. This allows the position of the substrate P to be transferred to the rotating drum 25 in the width direction to be the target position.

不過,由於第2基板檢測部208係配置在基板P捲繞於旋轉筒25前一刻之位置,當在此位置突發性的發生基板P之寬度方向之大的變化、例如對準標記Ks脫離對準顯微鏡AM1之檢測區域232般之大的位置偏差時,欲將待形成於曝光區域A7之圖案精密的加以定位將變得困難。此種情形 時,則實施終止對曝光區域A7之圖案形成並跳過、或暫時將基板P倒轉回一定長度後再次往順方向搬送並一邊進行使用對準顯微鏡AM1之對準標記Ks之再檢測等的程序(再嘗試動作等),直到對準標記Ks被捕捉置檢測區域232內為止。 However, since the second substrate detection unit 208 is disposed at a position immediately before the substrate P is wound around the rotating drum 25, a large change in the width direction of the substrate P occurs suddenly at this position, for example, the alignment mark Ks is detached. When the positional deviation of the detection area 232 of the microscope AM1 is large, it is difficult to precisely position the pattern to be formed in the exposure area A7. This situation In this case, procedures such as terminating the pattern formation of the exposed area A7 and skipping it, or temporarily reversing the substrate P back to a certain length, and then carrying it forward in the forward direction and performing re-detection of the alignment mark Ks using the alignment microscope AM1 (Retry the operation, etc.) until the alignment mark Ks is captured in the detection area 232.

如以上所述,第4實施形態亦能將曝光單元121c與位置調整單元120a分別以獨立狀態(振動傳遞受隔絕的狀態)設置。因此,曝光單元121c可藉由除振台131降低來自位置調整單元120a之振動,獲得與上述第1實施形態相同的效果。再者,第4實施形態中,下位控制裝置204係根據第1基板檢測部202、第2基板檢測部208及對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2之檢測結果,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a及基板調整部214。據此,可提升使用曝光頭210對基板P之圖案之曝光精度。下位控制裝置204根據相對位置檢測部234之檢測結果,控制邊緣位置控制器EPC3a及基板調整部214。據此,即使是在位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置產生變化之情形時,亦能提升使用曝光頭210對基板P之圖案之曝光精度。 As described above, the fourth embodiment can also set the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a in an independent state (a state where vibration transmission is blocked), respectively. Therefore, the exposure unit 121c can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120a by the vibration isolation table 131, and obtain the same effect as the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, and the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. . Accordingly, the exposure accuracy of the pattern of the substrate P using the exposure head 210 can be improved. The lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection result of the relative position detection unit 234. According to this, even when the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is changed, the accuracy of the exposure of the pattern of the substrate P using the exposure head 210 can be improved.

又,上述第4實施形態,雖係在曝光裝置U3內設置位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之構成,但只要是從基板P之搬送方向看,緊接著在位置調整單元120a之後設置曝光單元121c之構成即可。因此,可以不是在曝光裝置U3內設置位置調整單元120a。此場合,位置調整單元120a,從基板P之搬送方向看,可設置在如圖1所示之曝光裝置U3之前一個設置之處理裝置U(U2)側。或者,在曝光裝置U3之前一個設置基板供應裝置2之情形時,可於該基板供應裝置2內設置位置調整單元120a之功能。 In the fourth embodiment described above, although the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided in the exposure device U3, as long as it is viewed from the transport direction of the substrate P, the exposure unit 121c is provided immediately after the position adjustment unit 120a. Just make up. Therefore, the position adjustment unit 120a may not be provided in the exposure device U3. In this case, the position adjustment unit 120a may be disposed on the processing device U (U2) side provided before the exposure device U3 shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the conveying direction of the substrate P. Alternatively, in a case where the substrate supply device 2 is provided before the exposure device U3, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided in the substrate supply device 2.

又,在以曝光裝置U3、曝光單元121、121c等(第2處理單元 )進行之光圖案化步驟前一個之步驟,係於基板P表面形成(塗布)液狀感光層的步驟、與使該感光層乾燥(烘烤)的步驟成為一套。然而,作為感光層使用乾式薄膜時,則為使用貼合機等壓接式轉印裝置將乾式薄膜上之感光層以壓街方式轉印至作為被曝光基板之基板P表面的步驟(感光層形成步驟),有時是不需要乾燥步驟的。因此,作為職司光圖案化步驟前一個步驟之前處理裝置(第1處理單元),係於基板P表面形成感光層之感光層形成裝置、或乾燥基板P之乾燥(加熱)裝置,可在此等前處理裝置內之基板搬送路下游側(基板搬出部)、或該前處理裝置與光圖案化裝置之間設置位置調整單元120a之功能。 In addition, the exposure device U3, the exposure units 121, 121c, and the like (the second processing unit The step preceding the photo-patterning step is a step of forming (coating) a liquid photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P and a step of drying (baking) the photosensitive layer. However, when a dry film is used as the photosensitive layer, the step of transferring the photosensitive layer on the dry film to the surface of the substrate P as the substrate to be exposed is carried out using a compression bonding transfer device such as a laminator (photosensitive layer). The formation step) may not require a drying step. Therefore, as the processing device (first processing unit) before the previous step of the photo-patterning step, the photosensitive layer forming device for forming a photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P, or the drying (heating) device for drying the substrate P, can be used here. The function of the position adjustment unit 120a provided on the downstream side (substrate carrying-out portion) of the substrate conveying path in the pre-processing device, or between the pre-processing device and the photo-patterning device.

又,作為圖案化步驟使用印刷機之情形時,作為前一個步驟,為提高墨水對基板P表面之密接性,係實施對基板P表面整體、或僅對圖案待形成部分進行改質處理的步驟(撥液性/親液性之選擇性賦予步驟等)。由於此等表面改質處理步驟亦係以單獨或複數個前處理裝置實施,因此可在印刷機之前一個設置之前處理裝置內之基板搬送路下游側(基板搬出部)、或該前處理裝置與印刷機之間設置位置調整單元120a之功能。 When a printing machine is used as the patterning step, as a previous step, in order to improve the adhesion of the ink to the surface of the substrate P, the entire surface of the substrate P or only the portion to be patterned is modified. (Selection of liquid repellency / lyophilicity, etc.). Since these surface modification treatment steps are also implemented by a single or multiple pre-processing devices, the substrate conveyance path downstream (substrate carrying-out section) in the pre-processing device can be installed before the printing press, or the pre-processing device and the The function of the position adjustment unit 120a is provided between the printing presses.

上述第4實施形態中,雖係於位置調整單元120a設置第1基板檢測部202、於曝光單元121c設置第2基板檢測部208,但亦可僅設置第1基板檢測部202及第2基板檢測部208中之任一方。又,亦可不設置第1基板檢測部202及第2基板檢測部208之雙方。此係由於即使沒有第1基板檢測部202及第2基板檢測部208,亦能以對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2檢測基板P在寬度方向之位置等之故。 In the fourth embodiment described above, although the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided in the position adjustment unit 120a and the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided in the exposure unit 121c, only the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection may be provided. Any one of the sections 208. In addition, both of the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208 may not be provided. This is because the position of the substrate P in the width direction can be detected with the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 even if the first substrate detection section 202 and the second substrate detection section 208 are not provided.

上述第4實施形態中,雖係以處理裝置U3作為曝光裝置做了 說明,但只要是對基板P賦予圖案之圖案形成裝置即可。作為圖案形成裝置,例如除曝光裝置外,有藉由塗布墨水以對基板P賦予圖案之噴墨印刷機等。此場合,係將曝光頭210更換成具備將墨水作成液滴藉選擇性的進行賦予以於基板P描繪圖案之多數噴嘴的噴嘴頭部(圖案形成部),並將曝光單元121、121a~121c更換成具有圖案形成部之圖案化裝置。又,上述第1~第3實施形態亦同樣的,處理裝置U3可以是對基板P賦予圖案的圖案形成裝置。 In the fourth embodiment described above, the processing device U3 is used as the exposure device. The description is provided as long as it is a patterning device that applies a pattern to the substrate P. Examples of the pattern forming apparatus include an inkjet printer that applies a pattern of ink to the substrate P in addition to an exposure apparatus. In this case, the exposure head 210 is replaced with a nozzle head (pattern forming portion) having a plurality of nozzles for selectively applying a pattern of ink as a liquid droplet to the substrate P, and the exposure units 121, 121a to 121c are provided. The patterning device was replaced with a patterning device. In the same manner as in the first to third embodiments, the processing device U3 may be a pattern forming device that applies a pattern to the substrate P.

如上述各實施形態之說明,於基板P形成電子元件用微細圖案之曝光裝置及噴墨印刷機等之圖案化裝置,如何在基板P上精密的定位圖案加以形成是非常重要的。會導致其定位精度降低之干擾因素之一的振動,係從設置在附近之處理裝置內建的空壓用及液體用壓縮機或幫浦等產生,透過工廠之地面傳遞至支承曝光頭(圖案形成部)210及基板P之旋轉筒25等的支承構件。位隔絕該振動傳遞路徑,於圖案化裝置設置防振裝置(除振台131等)是有效的。此外,工廠地面(基礎)雖以盡可能堅固、且施工成共振頻率低者較佳,但上述各實施形態中,地面條件即使不那麼嚴謹,亦能精密的搬送基板P進行高精度之圖案化。 As described in each of the above embodiments, it is very important how to form a precise positioning pattern on the substrate P in an exposure device that forms a fine pattern for electronic components on the substrate P and a patterning device such as an inkjet printer. Vibration, which is one of the interfering factors that will cause its positioning accuracy to decrease, is generated from air compressors and liquid compressors or pumps built in nearby processing equipment and transmitted to the supporting exposure head (pattern) through the factory floor (Forming portion) 210 and supporting members such as the rotating cylinder 25 of the substrate P. It is effective to isolate the vibration transmission path, and it is effective to provide an anti-vibration device (such as a vibration isolation table 131) in the patterning device. In addition, although the factory floor (foundation) is preferably as solid as possible and constructed with a low resonance frequency, in the above embodiments, even if the ground conditions are not so strict, the substrate P can be accurately conveyed for patterning with high accuracy. .

例如,於建構生產線時,為避免通過圖案化裝置(曝光單元121、121a~121c)之基板P於寬度方向偏移,而進行圖案化裝置內之輥與圖案化裝置上游側處理裝置(位置調整單元120、120a)內之輥的平行化作業,但在基板P之處理開始後,隨著時間經過因裝置載重等影響,有可能產生地面局部些微凹陷而傾斜的情形。在此種情形下,可以第1基板檢測部202(202a、202b)及相對位置檢測部234測量基板P搬入圖案化裝置內時之寬度方向位置變位及變形(扭曲造成之微幅傾斜),以基板調整部214(輥AR1 、RT3、AR2)進行修正。 For example, when constructing a production line, in order to avoid the substrate P passing through the patterning device (exposure units 121, 121a to 121c) from shifting in the width direction, the roller in the patterning device and the upstream processing device (position adjustment of the patterning device) The parallelization operation of the rollers in the units 120 and 120a), but after the processing of the substrate P is started, due to the influence of the load of the device and the like, there may be a slight depression in the ground and a tilt. In this case, the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) and the relative position detection unit 234 can measure the positional displacement and deformation of the substrate P in the width direction when the substrate P is carried into the patterning device (a slight tilt caused by distortion). The substrate adjustment section 214 (roller AR1 , RT3, AR2).

又,第4實施形態之場合,以圖16所示之複數個輥(其中至少1個輥可傾斜)構成之基板調整部214,雖係設在圖12所示之曝光單元121c側之本體框架215,但亦可設置在位置調整單元120a內之本體框架207b。此場合,在為隔絕或抑制振動傳遞而彼此分離之位置調整單元120a(第1處理裝置)與曝光單元121c(第2處理裝置)中,設在曝光單元121c側之第2基板檢測部208,與圖2中所示之第2基板檢測部124同樣的,係設在引導輥Rs3、或張力輥RT1之近旁。再者,亦可與位置調整單元120a(第1處理裝置)及曝光單元121c(第2處理裝置)之雙方皆分開獨立的,將基板調整部214作為一單獨的單元設在設置面E。 In the case of the fourth embodiment, the substrate adjusting portion 214 composed of a plurality of rollers (at least one of which can be tilted) shown in FIG. 16 is a main body frame provided on the side of the exposure unit 121c shown in FIG. 12. 215, but the main body frame 207b in the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided. In this case, in the position adjustment unit 120a (the first processing device) and the exposure unit 121c (the second processing device) that are separated from each other in order to isolate or suppress transmission of vibration, a second substrate detection unit 208 provided on the exposure unit 121c side, Similar to the second substrate detection unit 124 shown in FIG. 2, it is provided near the guide roller Rs3 or the tension roller RT1. Furthermore, the substrate adjustment unit 214 may be provided on the installation surface E as a separate unit separately from both the position adjustment unit 120a (the first processing device) and the exposure unit 121c (the second processing device).

在進行光圖案化步驟之曝光單元121、121c等(第2處理單元)與職司光圖案化步驟前一步驟之前處理裝置(第1處理單元)之間,設置位置調整單元120a或第1基板檢測部202之情形時,可藉由第1基板檢測部202檢測從第1處理單元搬送至第2處理單元之基板P之位置變化。又,在第1處理單元內之基板P搬送方向下游側設置位置調整單元120a或第1基板檢測部202之情形時,可藉由第1基板檢測部202檢測從第1處理單元搬送至第2處理單元之基板P之位置變化,亦可以從第1基板檢測部202所檢測之基板P之位置、與以第2基板檢測部208或對準顯微鏡AM1、AM2檢測之基板P之位置,檢測從第1處理單元搬送至第2處理單元之基板P之位置變化。此外,亦可藉由相對位置檢測部234檢測位置調整單元120a與曝光單元121c之相對位置及位置變化,據以檢測從第1處理單元搬送至第2處理單元之基板P之位置變化。 A position adjustment unit 120a or a first substrate is provided between the exposure units 121, 121c, etc. (the second processing unit) that performs the light patterning step and the processing device (the first processing unit) before the previous step of the functional patterning step. In the case of the detection unit 202, the first substrate detection unit 202 can detect a change in the position of the substrate P that is transferred from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. When the position adjustment unit 120a or the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided on the downstream side of the substrate P in the conveying direction in the first processing unit, the first substrate detection unit 202 can detect the conveyance from the first processing unit to the second The position change of the substrate P of the processing unit can also be detected from the position of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 or the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. The position of the substrate P transferred from the first processing unit to the second processing unit changes. In addition, the relative position and position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c can be detected by the relative position detection unit 234, so that the position change of the substrate P transferred from the first processing unit to the second processing unit can be detected.

Claims (9)

一種基板處理裝置,其具備設在設置面上之除振台、與設在該除振台上並對被供應之基板進行曝光處理之曝光單元,該基板處理裝置之特徵在於,具備:位置調整單元,其具有:基台,以與該曝光單元非接觸之獨立狀態設置,並為調整供應至該曝光單元之該基板於寬度方向之位置而設在該設置面上;寬度移動機構,係設在該基台上,相對該基台使該基板移動於該基板之寬度方向;及固定輥,設在該基台上,將以該寬度移動機構進行位置調整後之該基板引導向該曝光單元,且相對該基台之位置被固定;第1基板檢測部,固定在該基台上,檢測被供應至該固定輥之該基板於寬度方向之位置;以及控制部,係根據該第1基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該寬度移動機構,以將被供應至該固定輥之該基板於寬度方向之位置修正至第1目標位置。A substrate processing apparatus includes a vibration isolator on an installation surface, and an exposure unit disposed on the vibration isolator and performing exposure processing on a supplied substrate. The substrate processing apparatus is characterized in that it includes: position adjustment The unit has: a base, provided in an independent state in non-contact with the exposure unit, and provided on the setting surface for adjusting the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit in the width direction; a width moving mechanism, On the base, the substrate is moved in the width direction of the substrate relative to the base; and a fixed roller is provided on the base and guides the substrate after the position adjustment by the width moving mechanism is directed to the exposure unit. And the position relative to the base is fixed; the first substrate detecting section is fixed on the base and detects the position of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller in the width direction; and the control section is based on the first substrate The detection result of the detection unit controls the width moving mechanism to correct the position of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller in the width direction to the first target position. 如申請專利範圍第1項之基板處理裝置,其中,該位置調整單元進一步具有調整該固定輥相對該曝光單元之位置的輥位置調整機構;並進一步具備:第2基板檢測部,係固定在該除振台上,檢測被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置;以及控制部,係根據該第2基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該輥位置調整機構,以將被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置修正至第2目標位置。For example, the substrate processing apparatus of the first patent application range, wherein the position adjustment unit further includes a roller position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the fixed roller relative to the exposure unit; and further includes: a second substrate detection section, which is fixed to the substrate Detecting the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit on the vibration-removing stage; and a control unit that controls the roller position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit to supply the The position of the substrate is corrected to the second target position. 如申請專利範圍第1項之基板處理裝置,其進一步具備:按壓機構,係對從該位置調整單元往該曝光單元供應之該基板進行按壓,以賦予張力;第2基板檢測部,係設於該除振台上,檢測被供應至該曝光單元之該基板之位置;以及控制部,根據該第2基板檢測部之檢測結果控制該按壓機構,以調整對該基板之按壓量。For example, the substrate processing apparatus of the scope of application for patent No. 1 further includes: a pressing mechanism for pressing the substrate supplied from the position adjustment unit to the exposure unit to impart tension; a second substrate detecting section is provided at On the vibration isolation table, a position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit is detected; and a control unit controls the pressing mechanism according to a detection result of the second substrate detection unit to adjust a pressing amount on the substrate. 如申請專利範圍第1至3項中任一項之基板處理裝置,其進一步包含驅動該曝光單元之驅動單元;該曝光單元,具有保持照明光照明之光罩的光罩保持構件、與支承來自該光罩之投影光所投射之該基板的基板支承構件;該驅動單元,具有為使該光罩往掃描方向移動而驅動該光罩保持構件的光罩側驅動部、與為使該基板往掃描方向移動而驅動該基板支承構件的基板側驅動部。For example, the substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a driving unit for driving the exposure unit; the exposure unit includes a mask holding member for holding a mask for illuminating the illumination light, and a support from A substrate supporting member of the substrate on which the projection light of the mask is projected; the driving unit includes a mask-side driving section that drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and The substrate-side driving portion of the substrate supporting member is driven to move in the scanning direction. 如申請專利範圍第4項之基板處理裝置,其中,該曝光單元,具有支承該光罩保持構件之第1框架、與支承該基板支承構件之第2框架;該除振台,包含設在該設置面與該第1框架之間的第1除振台、與設在該設置面與該第2框架之間的第2除振台。For example, the substrate processing apparatus according to item 4 of the patent application, wherein the exposure unit has a first frame supporting the mask holding member and a second frame supporting the substrate supporting member; the vibration isolation table includes a A first vibration isolator between the installation surface and the first frame, and a second vibration isolator between the installation surface and the second frame. 如申請專利範圍第4項之基板處理裝置,其中,該曝光單元具有支承該光罩保持構件及該基板支承構件的框架;該除振台係設在該設置面與該框架之間。For example, the substrate processing apparatus according to claim 4 in the patent application, wherein the exposure unit has a frame supporting the mask holding member and the substrate supporting member; and the vibration isolation table is provided between the installation surface and the frame. 如申請專利範圍第4項之基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件係保持具有以第1軸為中心之第1曲率半徑之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,沿著以第2軸為中心之第2曲率半徑的支承面支承該基板;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該基板支承構件,使該基板往掃描方向移動。For example, the substrate processing apparatus of the fourth scope of the patent application, wherein the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface with a first radius of curvature centered on the first axis; the mask-side driving section, The mask holding member is driven by rotation to move the mask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member supports the substrate along a supporting surface with a second radius of curvature centered on the second axis; the substrate-side driving section, by The substrate supporting member is driven to rotate to move the substrate in the scanning direction. 如申請專利範圍第4項之基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件係保持具有成平面之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由直線驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,沿著以第2軸為中心之第2曲率半徑的支承面支承該基板;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該基板支承構件,使該基板往掃描方向移動。For example, the substrate processing apparatus of claim 4 in which the photomask holding member holds the photomask having a flat photomask surface; the photomask-side driving section drives the photomask holding member in a straight line, Moving the photomask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member supports the substrate along a supporting surface with a second radius of curvature centered on the second axis; and the substrate-side driving section drives the substrate supporting member to rotate so that The substrate moves in the scanning direction. 如申請專利範圍第4項之基板處理裝置,其中,該光罩保持構件,係保持具有以第1軸為中心之第1曲率半徑之光罩面的該光罩;該光罩側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該光罩保持構件,使該光罩往掃描方向移動;該基板支承構件,具有將該基板之掃描方向的兩側支承為可旋轉之一對支承輥,以使該基板具有平面;該基板側驅動部,藉由旋轉驅動該一對支承輥,使該基板往掃描方向移動。For example, the substrate processing apparatus of claim 4 in which the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface with a first curvature radius centered on the first axis; the mask-side driving section, The photomask holding member is rotated to drive the photomask in the scanning direction; the substrate supporting member has a pair of support rollers that support both sides of the substrate in the scanning direction to be rotatable so that the substrate has a flat surface. ; The substrate-side driving section drives the pair of support rollers to rotate the substrate in the scanning direction by rotating.
TW103123245A 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Substrate processing device TWI627510B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013142922A JP2015018006A (en) 2013-07-08 2013-07-08 Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP2014123088A JP6459234B2 (en) 2014-06-16 2014-06-16 Substrate processing equipment

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201514631A TW201514631A (en) 2015-04-16
TWI627510B true TWI627510B (en) 2018-06-21

Family

ID=52279804

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW103123245A TWI627510B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Substrate processing device
TW107115588A TWI681261B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Component Manufacturing System
TW108146949A TWI706234B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Pattern forming device
TW109126679A TWI757817B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 patterning device

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW107115588A TWI681261B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Component Manufacturing System
TW108146949A TWI706234B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 Pattern forming device
TW109126679A TWI757817B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-07-07 patterning device

Country Status (5)

Country Link
KR (5) KR102219169B1 (en)
CN (3) CN108919607B (en)
HK (2) HK1257621A1 (en)
TW (4) TWI627510B (en)
WO (1) WO2015005118A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6561474B2 (en) * 2015-01-20 2019-08-21 大日本印刷株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible display device
WO2016204202A1 (en) * 2015-06-15 2016-12-22 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Production method for organic electroluminescent elements
WO2019012495A1 (en) * 2017-07-14 2019-01-17 エーエスエムエル ネザーランズ ビー.ブイ. Measurement apparatus
CN111103097A (en) * 2018-10-29 2020-05-05 长鑫存储技术有限公司 Water leakage detection equipment and exposure machine with same
KR102267473B1 (en) * 2019-06-26 2021-06-22 한국기계연구원 Fine pattern roll manufacturing system via tension control, and method of manufacturing fine pattern roll using the same
JP2019200433A (en) * 2019-08-01 2019-11-21 株式会社ニコン Pattern drawing method
KR102755075B1 (en) * 2019-11-15 2025-01-14 캐논 톡키 가부시키가이샤 Film forming apparatus
JP7441076B2 (en) * 2020-03-03 2024-02-29 株式会社Screenホールディングス drawing device
CN111580473B (en) * 2020-04-10 2021-05-28 彩虹集团有限公司 Method for automatically controlling glass extraction amount of liquid crystal substrate
US12063633B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2024-08-13 Qualcomm Incorporated SPS and ULCG enhancements
IL301222A (en) * 2020-09-28 2023-05-01 Asml Netherlands Bv Metrology tool with position control of projection system
JP7707042B2 (en) * 2021-11-26 2025-07-14 株式会社オーク製作所 Exposure Equipment
JP2023130748A (en) * 2022-03-08 2023-09-21 株式会社Screenホールディングス Exposure equipment and exposure method

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6019037U (en) * 1983-07-18 1985-02-08 株式会社リコー exposure equipment
JPH04296741A (en) * 1991-03-26 1992-10-21 Ushio Inc Film carrier mechanism and exposurre device provided with the same
JP2006098718A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Drawing apparatus
JP2008076650A (en) * 2006-09-20 2008-04-03 Nikon Corp Mask, exposure apparatus, exposure method, and device manufacturing method
JP2010207961A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Die cutting method for long film and device therefor
WO2011099563A1 (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 株式会社ニコン Substrate processing device

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3741013B2 (en) * 2001-09-17 2006-02-01 ウシオ電機株式会社 Belt-shaped workpiece exposure device with meandering correction mechanism
JP2006102991A (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image recording device and image recording method
CN100517080C (en) * 2006-04-27 2009-07-22 株式会社Orc制作所 Handling device
JP2009220945A (en) * 2008-03-17 2009-10-01 Orc Mfg Co Ltd Conveyance apparatus
CN101364052B (en) * 2008-10-08 2010-10-27 上海微电子装备有限公司 Active vibration damping system and forecast control method thereof
US8541163B2 (en) * 2009-06-05 2013-09-24 Nikon Corporation Transporting method, transporting apparatus, exposure method, and exposure apparatus
KR101070734B1 (en) * 2009-06-30 2011-10-07 건국대학교 산학협력단 Feedforward control of cross direction register system and methode for printed electronics roll-to-roll
US8379186B2 (en) * 2009-07-17 2013-02-19 Nikon Corporation Pattern formation apparatus, pattern formation method, and device manufacturing method
JP5738981B2 (en) * 2010-04-12 2015-06-24 エーエスエムエル ネザーランズ ビー.ブイ. Substrate handling apparatus, lithographic apparatus, tool, and device manufacturing method
CN103262209B (en) * 2010-12-15 2015-12-09 株式会社尼康 Substrate processing system and method for manufacturing electronic components

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6019037U (en) * 1983-07-18 1985-02-08 株式会社リコー exposure equipment
JPH04296741A (en) * 1991-03-26 1992-10-21 Ushio Inc Film carrier mechanism and exposurre device provided with the same
JP2006098718A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Drawing apparatus
JP2008076650A (en) * 2006-09-20 2008-04-03 Nikon Corp Mask, exposure apparatus, exposure method, and device manufacturing method
JP2010207961A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Die cutting method for long film and device therefor
WO2011099563A1 (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 株式会社ニコン Substrate processing device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HK1220776A1 (en) 2017-05-12
CN105556391A (en) 2016-05-04
TWI757817B (en) 2022-03-11
KR20190141793A (en) 2019-12-24
KR102058830B1 (en) 2019-12-23
KR20200037452A (en) 2020-04-08
CN107255908B (en) 2019-08-06
HK1245421B (en) 2020-05-15
HK1257621A1 (en) 2019-10-25
KR102007627B1 (en) 2019-08-05
KR101984360B1 (en) 2019-05-30
KR20160029099A (en) 2016-03-14
WO2015005118A1 (en) 2015-01-15
CN108919607A (en) 2018-11-30
TW201832017A (en) 2018-09-01
KR102097769B1 (en) 2020-04-07
TWI706234B (en) 2020-10-01
CN107255908A (en) 2017-10-17
TWI681261B (en) 2020-01-01
TW202013096A (en) 2020-04-01
TW202041981A (en) 2020-11-16
KR102219169B1 (en) 2021-02-23
KR20190091575A (en) 2019-08-06
CN105556391B (en) 2018-06-29
TW201514631A (en) 2015-04-16
CN108919607B (en) 2020-10-30
KR20190060003A (en) 2019-05-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI627510B (en) Substrate processing device
JP6773168B2 (en) Pattern exposure equipment
HK1245421A1 (en) Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus
TW201732444A (en) Exposure device, exposure system, substrate processing method, and component manufacturing device
JP6459234B2 (en) Substrate processing equipment
JP2015018006A (en) Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP6702404B2 (en) Device manufacturing system and device manufacturing method
JP2020166275A (en) Pattern forming device
HK1220776B (en) Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
TWI745865B (en) Substrate processing device and component manufacturing method
HK1207162A1 (en) Substrate processing device and device manufacturing method